Pankaj Narula

Celerio

Sr. Advisor (Service)

Dear Sir/Madam,
Thank you for choosing a Maruti Suzuki vehicle.
I hope our dealership team took good care while delivering the vehicle to you.
Your vehicle is equipped with state-of-the-art technologies. To get the best performance from
your vehicle (and ensure it is trouble-free), kindly get your vehicle serviced periodically, as per
the maintenance schedule in your Owner's Manual. Please make sure the service is done at a
Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for best results.
For any accessories that you wish to fit on to your vehicle, please contact any of our authorized
dealers for assistance. Kindly appreciate that any tampering of wiring harness to fit
Celerio

accessories may cause the vehicle to malfunction.

Thank you once again for choosing a Maruti Suzuki vehicle.
I wish you many years of safe and happy driving.

Yours sincerely

MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED (Pankaj Narula)

Palam Gurgaon Road,
Celerio

Gurgaon-122015
www.marutisuzuki.com
 “WARNING”

Vehicle may break-down, meet with an Avoid driving into or starting the vehicle in a
accident or catch fire due to heavily water logged area. Vehicle may break-
1. Installation of down or engine may fail due to
- High wattage bulbs 1. Water entry into the engine.
- Non genuine lamps / horns 2. Short circuiting of the electrical systems.
- Modified suspension / wheels
- Non genuine parts / accessories etc. If the vehicle is stuck in deep water, do not
2. Retrofitment of LPG / CNG fuel systems/kits. start / crank the vehicle until the level of water
3. Usage of domestic LPG.
drops below the level of exhaust pipe.
4. Short circuiting due to tampering of wiring harness.
NOTE:
IF THE VEHICLE IS SUBMERGED IN WATER, REPORT TO THE NEAREST
CAUTION: DO NOT STORE OR CARRY INFLAMMABLE MATERIALS IN THE VEHICLE. AUTHORIZED WORKSHOP.
 “CAUTION”
1. Retro-fitment of LPG / CNG kit may deteriorate vehicle performance, reduce engine & engine
related component’s life and also warranty will be null and void for such vehicles.
2. Do not use domestic LPG/LPG cylinder for your factory fitted LPG vehicles.
3. Usage of domestic LPG for running vehicles is prohibited as per law.
4. Do not remove company fitted LPG/CNG kit to install some other kit. It may affect vehicle
performance and may cause fire.
5. Drive slowly on wet roads. Tires may slip while braking at higher speeds due to aquaplaning.
(reduced contact area between tire and road due to presence of water)
6. Do not leave engine running in garages or confined areas, with passengers inside. This may result in
accumulation of carbon-monoxide in cabin and may lead to suffocation or breathing problems.
7. Do not park vehicle on dry leaves or grass. This may lead to fire due to hot catalytic converter,
igniting the dry leaves/grass.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with CNG/LPG, ensure availability of fire extinguisher in the vehicle all the time.
9. Always wear seat belt at all the times.
10. Do not use mobile phone while driving.
11. Avoid Smoking in the car, live bud thrown in car may cause fire.
12. Do not put any body part under the vehicle when it is supported on a Jack.
13. Do not use non-genuine accessories in your vehicle.
14. Do not fit accessories from unauthorized workshops/sources.
15. Usage of non-approved electrical accessories in your vehicle may result in spark, fire or personal
injury.
 &86720(5¶6&23< .0RU0217+
:+,&+(9(5&20(6),567 '($/(5¶6&23<.0RU0217+
,1$/#4-Ũ%JGEMGF1-##FLWUV%%NGCP44GRNCEGQT%JCPIG..WDTKECVG66KIJVGP
14QVCVG++PURGEVCPFEQTTGEVQTTGRNCEGKHPGEGUUCT[ 3OHDVHVHHRYHUOHDIIRUVSHFLDOLQVWUXFWLRQV

/QFGN%QFG

'PIKPG%QQNCPV
.GXGN.GCMCIG
5VGGTKPIYJGGN
2NC[

'PIKPG1KN
.GXGN.GCMCIG
#NN4QFU#TOU
.QQUG&COCIG9GCT %JCUUKU0Q

%QQNKPI5[UVGOJQUGUEQPPGEVKQPU
2QYGT5VGGTKPI5[UVGO
1RGTCVKQP

.GCMCIG&COCIG
5VGGTKPIIGCTDQZ
+PURGEV 'PIKPG0Q

'PIKPG/QWPVKPICPF/CPKHQNF(KZKPI
6KNV6GNGUEQRKE
KHGSWKRRGFUVGGTKPI
1RGTCVKQP

0QKUG.GCMCIG&COCIGGVE /KNGCIG

&CVGQH&GNKXGT[

(WGNſNVGT(WGNVCPMECR(WGNNKPGUCPF
$CVVGT[GNGEVTQN[VG
.GXGN.GCMCIG
EQPPGEVKQPU
.GCMCIG
.KIJVKPI5[UVGO*QTP
1RGTCVKQP &CVGQH+PURGEVKQP

(WGN(KNVGT9CVGT&TCKPKPI
9KRGT
1RGTCVKQP
4GIKUVTCVKQP0Q

%NWVEJ5NKRRKPI
&TCIIKPI&COCIG
#NN.CVEJGU*KPIGU.QEMU%GPVTCN 5GTXKEG&GCNGT%QFG

6TCPUOKUUKQP1KN
.GXGN.GCMCIG .QEMKPI
1RGTCVKQP

)GCT5JKHVGT%CDNG
1RGTCVKQP %WUVQOGT0COG

%NWVEJƀWKF
.GXGN.GCMCIG )&"5*/(
"/%
,‡
" /"  

&TKXGDGNV
6GPUKQP

%JGEMHWPEVKQPKPIQH4GEKTEƀCR

$TCMGƀWKF
.GXGN.GCMCIG
%JGEMCNN*QUG,QKPVU #FFTGUU
2NGCUGYTKVGEQORNGVGCFFTGUU

$TCMG2GFCN
2GFCNVQ9CNN%NGCTCPEG

2CTMKPIDTCMGNGXGT
2NC[

$TCMGJQUGURKRGU
.GCMCIG&COCIG

1RGTCVKQPQH$TCMGUENWVEJ)GCT
UJKHVKPICPF5RGGFQOGVGT

6[TGU
#KTRTGUUWTG#DPQTOCNYGCT%TCEM
$QF[%JCUUKUPQKUG

9JGGNU
&COCIG

5VTWVU5JQEM#DUQTDGTU
1KNNGCMCIG

/GEJCPKEŏU5KIPCVWTG
&2672)0$7(5,$/6$1'&21680$%/(672%(%251(%<&86720(5
5GTXKEG/CPCIGTŏU5KIPCVWTG
0RGHO&RGH6&URVV'HQJLQHPRGHO$.1'
6&URVV'HQJLQHPRGHO$.1' %WUVQOGTŏU5KIPCVWTG
 /QFGN%QFG

%JCUUKU0Q

'PIKPG0Q

/KNGCIG

&CVGQH&GNKXGT[

&CVGQH+PURGEVKQP

4GIKUVTCVKQP0Q

5GTXKEG&GCNGT%QFG

%WUVQOGT0COG

#FFTGUU
2NGCUGYTKVGEQORNGVGCFFTGUU
)RU6HUYLFLQJ'HDOHU

/GEJCPKEŏU5KIPCVWTG

5GTXKEG/CPCIGTŏU5KIPCVWTG

%WUVQOGTŏU5KIPCVWTG
 (CUSTOMER’S COPY) (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS)
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST (DEALER’S COPY) (5,000 KM or 6 MONTHS)
JOB MARK: √ : Checked OK, A: Adjust, C: Clean, R: Replace or Change, L: Lubricate, T: Tighten,
Please see overleaf for special instructions
O: Rotate, I: Inspect and correct or replace if necessary
Model Code*
1. Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage) 1. Steering wheel (Play) Chassis No. :
2. Engine Oil (Level, Leakage) 2. All Rods & Arms (Loose, Damage, Wear)
3. Cooling System hoses & connections 3. Power Steering System (Operation) Engine No. :
(Leakage, Damage) 4. Steering gear box (Inspect)
4. Engine Mounting and Manifold Fixing 5. Tilt / Telescopic (if equipped) steering (Operation) Mileage
(Noise, Leakage, Damage etc.)
5. Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage) Date of Delivery
1. Battery electrolyte (Level, Leakage)
2. Lighting System/Horn (Operation) Date of Inspection
1. Fuel Filter, Fuel tank cap, Fuel lines and
connection (Leakage) 3. Wiring Harness Connections (Looseness)
4. AUX / USB / Accessory Socket (Operation) Registration No.
2. Fuel filter water draining
5. Wiper (Operation)
Service Dealer Code
1. Clutch Slipping (Draging, Damage)
1. All Latches, Hinges & Locks/Central Locking
2. Transmission Oil (Level, Leakage)
(Operation)
3. Gear Shifter Cable (Operation)
2. All Chassis nuts & Bolts (Inspect)
4. Drive shaft boots (Damage)
3. Seat belt (Operation)
5. Clutch fluid (Level, Leakage)
4. Seat latch, lever & knob (Operation)

1. Brake fluid (Level, Leakage) HEATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

1. Drive belt (Tension)
2. Brake Pedal (Pedal to Wall Clearance)
2. Check functioning of Recirc flap
3. Parking brake lever (Play)
3. Check all Hose Joints
4. Brake Disc and pad (Inspect)
4. Tighten Compressor Mounting Bolts
5. Brake hoses & pipes (Leakage, Damage)
5. Clean Condenser with low pressure water
6. A/C filter element (Inspect)
1. Tyres (Air pressure, Abnormal wear, Rotation) Mechanic’s Signature
2. Wheels (Inspect)
3. Front / Rear wheel Bearing (Loose, Damage) 1. Operation of Brakes, clutch, Gear
shifting and Speedometer Service Manager’s Signature
2. Body & Chassis noise
1. Suspension Struts/Shock Absorbers (Oil leakage) Customer’s Signature
2. Suspension arms, Knuckle, Rear spring
(Damage, Loose)
3. All nuts & Bolts (Tighten)
* Model Code: S-Cross (D16 engine model) - AKN416D
S-Cross (D13 engine model) - AKN413D
COST OF MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES TO BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER
 /QFGN%QFG

%JCUUKU0Q

'PIKPG0Q

/KNGCIG

&CVGQH&GNKXGT[

&CVGQH+PURGEVKQP

4GIKUVTCVKQP0Q

5GTXKEG&GCNGT%QFG

)RU6HUYLFLQJ'HDOHU

/GEJCPKEŏU5KIPCVWTG

5GTXKEG/CPCIGTŏU5KIPCVWTG

%WUVQOGTŏU5KIPCVWTG
 &86720(5¶6&23< .0RU0217+6
:+,&+(9(5&20(6),567
'($/(5¶6&23<.0RU0217+6
,1$/#4-Ũ%JGEMGF1-##FLWUV%%NGCP44GRNCEGQT%JCPIG..WDTKECVG66KIJVGP
3OHDVHVHHRYHUOHDIIRUVSHFLDOLQVWUXFWLRQV
14QVCVG++PURGEVCPFEQTTGEVQTTGRNCEGKHPGEGUUCT[
/QFGN%QFG
'PIKPG%QQNCPV
.GXGN.GCMCIG 5VGGTKPIYJGGN
2NC[
%JCUUKU0Q
'PIKPG1KN1KNſNVGT
4GRNCEG #NN4QFU#TOU
.QQUG&COCIG9GCT
%QQNKPI5[UVGOJQUGUEQPPGEVKQPU 2QYGT5VGGTKPI5[UVGO
1RGTCVKQP
'PIKPG0Q

.GCMCIG&COCIG 5VGGTKPIIGCTDQZ
+PURGEV
'PIKPG/QWPVKPICPF/CPKHQNF(KZKPI 6KNV6GNGUEQRKEUVGGTKPI
KHGSWKRRGF
1RGTCVKQP /KNGCIG

0QKUG.GCMCIG&COCIGGVE
&CVGQH&GNKXGT[
$CVVGT[GNGEVTQN[VG
.GXGN.GCMCIG
#KTENGCPGTſNVGTGNGOGPV
%NGCP .KIJVKPI5[UVGOJQTP
1RGTCVKQP
(WGN(KNVGT(WGNVCPMECR(WGNNKPGUCPF &CVGQH+PURGEVKQP
9KTKPI*CTPGUU%QPPGEVKQPU
.QQUGPGUU
EQPPGEVKQP
.GCMCIG #7:75$#EEGUUQT[5QEMGV
1RGTCVKQP
(WGNſNVGTYCVGTFTCKPKPI 4GIKUVTCVKQP0Q
9KRGT
1RGTCVKQP
5GTXKEG&GCNGT%QFG
%NWVEJ5NKRRKPI
&TCIIKPI&COCIG
#NN%JCUUKU0WVCPF$QNVU
6KIJVGP
6TCPUOKUUKQP1KN
.GXGN.GCMCIG
#NN.CVEJGU*KPIGU.QEMU%GPVTCN
)GCT5JKHVGT%CDNG
1RGTCVKQP
.QEMKPI
1RGTCVKQP
&TKXGUJCHVDQQVU
&COCIG
%NWVEJƀWKF
.GXGN.GCMCIG )&"5*/(
"/%
&TKXGDGNV
6GPUKQP
%JGEMHWPEVKQPKPIQH4GEKTEƀCR
$TCMGƀWKF
.GXGN.GCMCIG
$TCMG2GFCN
2GFCNVQYCNN%NGCTCPEG %JGEMCNN*QUG,QKPVU
2CTMKPIDTCMGNGXGT
2NC[ 6KIJVGP%QORTGUUQT/QWPVKPI$QNVU
$TCMG&KUE2CFU
+PURGEV %NGCP%QPFGPUGTYKVJNQYRTGUUWTGYCVGT
$TCMGJQUGURKRGU
.GCMCIG&COCIG
$TCMG&TWOU5JQGU
+PURGEV 1RGTCVKQPQH$TCMGUENWVEJ)GCT
UJKHVKPICPF5RGGFQOGVGT
$QF[%JCUUKUPQKUG
6[TGU
#KTRTGUUWTG#DPQTOCNYGCT4QVCVKQP /GEJCPKEŏU5KIPCVWTG
9JGGNU
+PURGEV
(TQPV4GCTYJGGN$GCTKPI
.QQUG&COCIG 5GTXKEG/CPCIGTŏU5KIPCVWTG

5WURGPUKQP5VTWVU5JQEM#DUQTDGTU
1KNNGCMCIG %WUVQOGTŏU5KIPCVWTG
5WURGPUKQPCTOU-PWEMNG4GCTURTKPI

&COCIG.QQUG
#NNPWVU$QNVU
6KIJVGP
0RGHO&RGH6&URVV'HQJLQHPRGHO$.1'
6&URVV'HQJLQHPRGHO$.1'
&2672)0$7(5,$/6$1'&21680$%/(672%(%251(%<&86720(5
 /QFGN%QFG

%JCUUKU0Q

'PIKPG0Q

/KNGCIG

&CVGQH&GNKXGT[

&CVGQH+PURGEVKQP

4GIKUVTCVKQP0Q

5GTXKEG&GCNGT%QFG

)RU6HUYLFLQJ'HDOHU

/GEJCPKEŏU5KIPCVWTG

5GTXKEG/CPCIGTŏU5KIPCVWTG

%WUVQOGTŏU5KIPCVWTG
FOREWORD MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED believes
in conservation and protection of Earth’s
This manual is an essential part of your natural resources. All information in this manual is based
To that end, we encourage every vehicle on the latest product information avail-
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle able at the time of publication. Due to
when resold or otherwise transferred to a owner to recycle, trade-in or properly dis-
improvements or other changes, there
new owner or operator. Please read this pose of, as appropriate, used Engine Oil,
may be discrepancies between informa-
manual carefully before operating your coolant and other fluids, batteries and tion in this manual and your vehicle.
new vehicle and review the manual from tyres etc. MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED
time to time. It contains important informa- reserves the right to make production
tion on safety, operation and maintenance. MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED changes at any time, without notice and
You are invited to avail the three Free without incurring any obligation to
Inspection Services as described in the make the same or similar changes to
manual. Three free inspection coupons are vehicles previously built or sold.
attached to this manual. Please show this
This vehicle may not comply with stan-
manual to your while you take your vehicle dards or regulations of other countries.
for any Service. Before attempting to register this vehi-
To prolong the life of your vehicle and cle in any other country, check all appli-
reduce maintenance cost, the periodic cable regulations and make any neces-
maintenance must be carried out accord- sary modifications.
ing to “PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE” described in “INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE” section of this man-
ual. It is essential for preventing trouble
and accidents to ensure your satisfaction
and safety.
Daily inspection and care as per “DAILY
INSPECTION CHECKLIST” described in
the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
section of this manual is essential for pro-
longing the life of the vehicle and for safe
driving.

0-1
IMPORTANT MODIFICATION WARN-
NOTE
WARNING/ CAUTION/NOTICE/
ING
Please read this manual and follow its
instructions carefully. To emphasize spe- WARNING
cial information, the symbol and the words
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and Do not modify your vehicle. Modifica-
NOTE have special meanings. Pay particu- tion could adversely affect safety,
lar attention to messages highlighted by handling, performance, or durability
these signal words: and may violate governmental regula-
tions. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from
WARNING modification may not be covered
Indicates a potential hazard that 75F135
under warranty.
could result in death or serious
injury. The circle with a slash in this manual
means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap- NOTICE
pen”.
Improper installation of mobile com-
CAUTION munication equipment such as cellu-
Indicates a potential hazard that lar telephones, CB (Citizen’s Band)
could result in minor or moderate radios or any other wireless transmit-
injury. ters may cause electronic interfer-
ence with your vehicle’s ignition
system, resulting in vehicle perfor-
NOTICE mance problems. Consult your
Indicates a potential hazard that authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
could result in vehicle damage. or qualified service technician for
advice.

NOTE:
Indicates special information to make NOTICE
maintenance easier or instructions clearer. Severe damage may be caused by
the use of either poor quality fuel
and/or lubricants not recommended
by MARUTI SUZUKI.
0-2

55KS0-74E
VEHICLE DETAILS
BATTERY
DATE OF ODOMETER
MODEL CHASSIS NO. ENGINE NO. KEY NO. SR.NO.
DELIVERY READING (KM) MAKE
BATCH CODE

OWNER’S NAME & ADDRESS ________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-mail ID_____________________________________________________________TEL.NO. ______________________________

ADDRESS/STAMP OF SELLING DEALER SELLING DEALER CODE

SHOWROOM

WORKSHOP IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO CUSTOMER

Dear Customer,
For any assistance with regard to our product, please contact
General Manager/Works Manager at any of our authorised Maruti
Suzuki NEXA dealer / authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. For
additional inquiry you may contact our Regional Office or
Service Department. The Addresses and Phone nos. are given in
Service Network Booklet provide along with the vehicle.

0-3
MAINTENANCE SERVICE RECORDS
DATE OF KIND OF MILEAGE DESCRIPTION OF JOB NAME OF SERVICING DEALER JOB CARD NO. MECHANIC’S
SERVICE SERVICE (KM) SIGNATURE

F: .... FREE SERVICE, P:.... PAID SERVICE, W:.... WARRANTY JOB, A:.... ACCIDENTAL JOB
0-4

55KS0-74E
WARRANTY POLICY (4) Limitation:
This warranty shall not apply to:
Maruti Suzuki India Limited (hereinafter called “Maruti Suzuki”), (a) Normal maintenance service required other than the three
warrants that each new Maruti Suzuki vehicle distributed in India free services, including without limitation, oil and fluid
by Maruti Suzuki and sold by an authorised Maruti Suzuki changes, headlight aiming, fastener retightening, wheel bal-
NEXA dealer will be free, under normal use and service, ancing, wheel alignment and tyre rotation, cleaning of injec-
from any defects in material and workmanship at the time of tors, adjustments of clutch and valve clearance.
manufacture SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND (b) The replacement of normal wear parts including without lim-
CONDITIONS: itation, bulbs, tyres and tubes, spark plugs, belts, hoses, fil-
ters, wiper blades, brushes, contact points, fuses, clutch
(1) Qualification: disc, brake shoes, brake pads, cable and all rubber parts
To qualify for this warranty: (except oil seal and glass run).
The Maruti Suzuki vehicle must be delivered by an authorised (c) Any vehicle which has been used for competition or racing.
Maruti Suzuki NEXA dealer and serviced by authorised Maruti (d) Any repairs or replacement required as a result of accidents
Suzuki workshop. or collision.
(e) Any defects caused by misuse, negligence, abnormal use or
(2) Term: insufficient care.
The term of the warranty shall be twenty-four (24) months or (f) Any vehicle which has been modified or altered, including
40,000 kilometers (whichever occurs first) from the date of without limitation, the installation of performance accesso-
delivery to the first owner. ries.
(g) Any vehicle on which parts or accessories not approved by
(3) Maruti Suzuki Warranty Obligation: Maruti Suzuki have been used.
If any defect(s) should be found in a Maruti Suzuki vehicle within (h) Any vehicle which has not been operated in accordance with
the term stipulated above, Maruti Suzuki’s only obligation is to the operating instructions in this Owner’s Manual and Ser-
repair or replace at its sole discretion any part shown to be defec- vice Booklet.
tive, with a new part or the equivalent at no cost to the owner for (i) Any vehicle which has not received, during the warranty term,
parts or labour, when Maruti Suzuki acknowledges that such a the service inspections prescribed in this Owner’s Manual
defect is attributable to faulty material or workmanship at the time and Service Booklet.
of manufacture. The owner is responsible for any repair or replace- (j) Any vehicle which has been assembled, disassembled,
ments which are not covered by this warranty. adjusted or repaired by other than authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
(k) Any vehicle which has been used for purposes other than
what it was designed for.
(l) Any damage or deterioration caused by industrial pollution
and bird droppings.
0-5
(m) Insignificant defects which do not affect the function of the – Make certain that the authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
vehicle including without limitation, sound, vibration and fluid the service inspection has certified the work on the “Mainte-
seep. nance Service Record” page in the “Owner’s Manual and
(n) Any natural wear and tear including without limitation, aging Service Booklet” and
etc. – Present the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and Service
(o) Installation and usage of domestic LPG gas/LPG Cylinder.
(p) V-belts, hoses and gas leaks. Booklet” to the authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop when-
(q) Any vehicle retrofitted with LPG/CNG kits. ever requesting service inspections or warranty service.
If the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet” should be lost or
(5) Extent of Warranty: destroyed the owner should consult the authorised Maruti Suzuki
This warranty is the entire written warranty given by Maruti Suzuki workshop from whom the vehicle was purchased for instructions
for Maruti Suzuki vehicles and no dealer or its or his agent or concerning replacement of the “Owner’s Manual and Service
employee is authorised to extend or enlarge this warranty and no Booklet”.
dealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to make any
oral warranty on Maruti Suzuki’s behalf. (8) Disclaimer of Consequential Damage:
Maruti Suzuki reserves the right to add any improvements or Maruti Suzuki assumes no responsibility for loss of vehicle, loss of
change the design of any model at any time with no obligation to time, inconvenience or any other indirect incidental or consequen-
make the same changes on units previously sold. tial damage resulting from the vehicle not being available to the
owner because of any defect covered by this warranty.
(6) Warranty Service:
To obtain warranty service, the complete vehicle must be pre- (9) Change of Owner
sented at the owner’s expenses to any authorised Maruti Suzuki Even if ownership of the vehicle changes, the remaining warranty
workshop. period is effective for the new owner.

(7) Owner’s Warranty Responsibilities:

It is responsibility of each owner to:
– Make certain that the PDl card was completed at the time of
delivery of the vehicle;
– Have performed, at his own expenses, by an authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop all the service inspections specified
in the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet”
and maintain adequate proof that such service inspections
have been performed.

0-6

55KS0-74E
EMISSION WARRANTY POLICY 3. The method of examination for deciding the warranty of the
parts will be at the sole discretion of Maruti Suzuki and autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop and results of the examination
Maruti Suzuki offers the Emission Warranty on all Maruti Suzuki will be final and binding. If after examination, the warrantable
vehicles (apart from the Regular Warranty and will run parallel to condition is not established, Maruti Suzuki and authorised
the regular product warranty) only in four metropolitan cities (New Maruti Suzuki workshop has the right to charge all, or part of
Delhi, Kolkata, Mumbai and Chennai) with effect from July 1st, the cost of such examination.
2001.
4. Under Emission Warranty, the parts (as given in Annexure - A)
Terms: will be changed free of cost, but the consumables will be
The Emission Warranty will be applicable for 80,000 kms or 3 charged as per actual.
years (Whichever comes earlier) from the date of delivery to the 5. If the part covered under Emission Warranty or the associated
first owner. The remaining warranty terms will be valid in case of parts, are not independently replaceable, on account of these
any change in ownership provided the production of all valid docu- being integral parts of a complete assembly, Maruti Suzuki and
ments. authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop will have the sole discre-
tion to replace either the entire assembly or by using some of
Conditions: the parts of the system through suitable repairs or modifica-
1. Under Emission Warranty, Warranty claims will be admitted for tions.
a prima-facie examination, in case vehicle fails to meet the
6. Any consequential repairs or replacement of parts which may
Emission Standard as specified in sub rule (2) of rule no. 115
be found necessary to establish compliance of Emission War-
of Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR), 1989.
ranty, will not be considered under warranty, unless the same is
2. The warranty claims will only be accepted after examination under product warranty. The consumable will be charged as
carried out by Maruti Suzuki or authorised Maruti Suzuki work- per actual under such repair or replacement.
shop which leads to firm conclusions that the 7. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for the cost of transporta-
a) Original settings have not been tempered in any case. tion of the vehicle to the nearest Maruti Suzuki dealer work-
b) Part (as given in Annexure - A) has a manufacturing defect. shop or any loss due to non-availability of the vehicle during
c) Vehicle is unable to meet the Emission Standards (as given the period of lodging of a warranty claim and examination and/
in 1.), inspite of the vehicle having been maintained and or repair by authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
used in accordance with the instructions as specified in
Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet and the used fuel and 8. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for any penalty that may
different oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil, Brake oil etc.) are be charged by statutory authorities on account of failure to
also as per specification. comply with the EMISSION STANDARDS.

0-7
9. Emission Warranty will not be affected by the change of owner, Annexure - A
provided all the documents are available. List of parts covered under Emission Warranty
10.All maintenance actions (as specified in the Owner’s Manual 1. Fuel Injector Assembly, Pressure Regulator, Throttle Body
and Service Booklet) need to be followed and recorded in the Assembly.
manual for emission warranty. 2. Electronic Control Module (ECM).
11.The customer needs to produce the PUC (Pollution Under 3. Intake Manifold.
Control) certificate valid for the period preceding the test during 4. EGR valve.
which the failure is discovered. The receipts (for the mainte-
5. Ignition Coil.
nance of the vehicle as per specification in Owner’s Manual
and Service Booklet from the date of original purchase of the 6. Canister Assembly.
vehicle) will also be required. 7. Vapour Liquid Seperator.
8. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.
Conditions under which the Emission Warranty is not 9. PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve.
APPLICABLE 10. Oil Filler Cap.
1. In the absence of valid PUC certificate. 11. Catalytic Convertor.
2. Vehicle not serviced from authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop 12. Exhaust Manifold.
as per the schedule specified in the Owner’s Manual and
13. All Fuel Injection System related SENSORS.
Service Booklet.
14. High Pressure Fuel Pump.
3. Vehicle subjected to abnormal use (accident, motor race, ral-
lies or for the purpose of establishing the records etc). 15. Glow Plug.
16. Glow Plug Controller.
4. Use of non MGP (Maruti Genuine Part).
5. Vehicle that has been tampered with.
6. Tampering with odometer so that the actual kilometer reading
can not be determined.
7. Use of adulterated fuel and/or unspecified oils (Engine oil,
Transmission oil and Brake oil etc).

0-8

55KS0-74E
TABLE OF CONTENTS FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1

BEFORE DRIVING 2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

DRIVING TIPS 4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

EMERGENCY SERVICE 8

APPEARANCE CARE 9

GENERAL INFORMATION 10

SPECIFICATIONS 11

SERVICE NETWORK 12

79MH0-74E
 FUEL RECOMMENDATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1
Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1

64MS0-74E
FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Fuel Recommendation
The diesel fuel should be with Cetane NOTICE
Number (CN) higher than 51 and sulfur Be careful not to spill fuel containing
content less than 50 ppm (parts per mil- alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
lion). spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up
MARUTI SUZUKI recommends to use the immediately. Fuels containing alco-
diesel fuel conformable to EN590. Do not hol can cause paint damage, which is
use marine diesel fuel, heating oils and so not covered under the New Vehicle
forth. Limited Warranty.

NOTICE
The fuel tank has an air space to
allow for fuel expansion in hot
weather. If you continue to add fuel
after the filler nozzle has automati-
cally shut off or an initial blow-back
occurs, the air chamber will become
full. Exposure to heat when fully
fueled in this manner will result in
leakage due to fuel expansion. To
prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
after the filler nozzle has automati-
cally shut off, or when using an alter-
native non-automatic system, initial
vent blow-back occurs.

1-1

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

BEFORE DRIVING
Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1
Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-2 2
Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/
Keyless Entry System Transmitter .................................... 2-5
Security System (if equipped) ............................................ 2-14
Windows .............................................................................. 2-16
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-19
Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-21
Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-23
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-26
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags)
(if equipped).......................................................................... 2-40
Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-46
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-47
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-47
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-47
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-48
Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-48
Information Display ............................................................. 2-49
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-62
Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-68
Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-71
Headlight Leveling Switch .................................................. 2-72
Turn Signal Control Lever .................................................. 2-72
Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-73
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-73
Tilt/Telescoping (if equipped) Steering Lock Lever ......... 2-77
Horn ...................................................................................... 2-78
Heated Rear Window Switch (if equipped) ....................... 2-78

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Keys Immobilizer System NOTE:

This system is designed to help prevent If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
vehicle theft by electronically disabling the tem warning light blinks or comes on, a
EXAMPLE engine starting system. message may be shown on the information
The engine can be started only with your display.
vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key For vehicles without keyless push start
or keyless push start system remote con- system
troller which has an electronic identification If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to
code programmed into it. The key or the “LOCK” position, then turn it back to
remote controller communicates the identi- the “ON” position.
fication code to the vehicle when the igni- If the light still blinks after the ignition
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or switch is turned back to the “ON” position,
the engine switch is pressed to change the there may be something wrong with your
ignition mode to ON. If you need to make key or with the immobilizer system. Ask
54G489
spare keys or remote controllers, see your your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to
Your vehicle comes with a pair of keys. authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. The have the system inspected.
The key(s) may or may not be equipped vehicle must be programmed with the cor-
with a transmitter depending on model rect identification code for the spare. A key For vehicles with keyless push start
variant. Keep the spare key in a safe made by an ordinary locksmith will not start system
place. One key can open all of the locks on the engine. If this light blinks, change the ignition mode
the vehicle. to “LOCK” (OFF), then change back to
The key identification number is stamped “ON”. Also refer to “If the master warning
on a metal tag provided with the keys or on indicator light blinks and the engine cannot
the keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in a be started” in “Starting the Engine (Vehicle
safe place. If you lose your keys, you will with Keyless Push Start System)” in the
need this number to have new keys made. “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
Write the number below for your future ref- If the light still blinks after the ignition mode
erence. 80JM122 is changed back to “ON”, there may be
something wrong with your key or with the
KEY NUMBER: If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys- immobilizer system. Ask your authorised
tem warning light blinks when the ignition Maruti Suzuki workshop to have the sys-
switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition tem inspected.
mode is ON, the engine will not start.
The immobilizer/keyless push start system
warning light may also blinks if the remote
controller is not in the vehicle when you

2-1

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

close the door or attempt to start the Ignition Key Reminder (if equipped) Door Locks
engine.
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
NOTE: you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
Side Door Locks
• If you lose your immobilizer ignition key ignition switch when the driver’s door is
or remote controller, see your authorised opened.
Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as pos-
sible to have the lost one deactivated, (1)
then have the new key or remote con- (2)
troller made by them.
• If you own other vehicles with immobi-
lizer keys, keep those keys away from (4)
the ignition switch or the engine switch
when using your Vehicle, or the engine
may not start because they may interfere
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system. (3)
• If you attach any metal objects to the
immobilizer key or remote controller, it
64MS018
may not start the engine.
(1) LOCK
NOTICE (2) UNLOCK
(3) Front
The immobilizer key and remote con- (4) Rear
troller are sensitive electronic instru- To lock a front door from outside the vehi-
ments. To avoid damaging them: cle:
• Do not expose them to impacts,
moisture or high temperature such • Insert the key and turn the top of the key
as on the dashboard under direct toward the rear of the vehicle, or
sunlight. • Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and
• Keep them away from magnetic hold the door handle as you close the
objects. door.
To unlock a front door from outside the
vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of
the key toward the front of the vehicle.

2-2

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Central Door Locking System NOTE:

You can switch the function that unlocks all
(1) doors from twice operations to once opera-
(2) tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode
(1) of the information display. For details on
(2) how to use the information display, refer to
“Information Display” in this section.
(4) To unlock the driver’s door only, insert the
key in that door lock and turn the top of the
key toward the front of the vehicle once.

(3) EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE
Door Lock Knob 64MS020

64MS019 (1) LOCK (1)

(1) LOCK (2) UNLOCK (2)
(2) UNLOCK (3) Front
To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn (4) Rear
the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob
rearward to unlock the door. You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-
ing the tailgate) simultaneously by using
To lock a rear door from outside the vehi- the key in the driver’s door lock. (3)
cle, turn the lock knob forward and close
the door. You do not need to pull and hold To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the
the door handle as you close the door. key in the driver’s door lock and turn the
top of the key toward the rear of the vehi-
NOTE: cle once. 64MS021
Be sure to hold the door handle when you (1) LOCK
close a locked front door, or the door will To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert
the key in the driver’s door lock and turn (2) UNLOCK
not remain locked.
the top of the key toward the front of the
vehicle twice. You can also lock or unlock all doors by
depressing the front or rear of the switch,
(3) respectively.

2-3

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Child-Proof Locks (rear door) Tailgate

EXAMPLE

(2)

(1)
NOTE:
• You can also lock or unlock all doors by
operating the transmitter or remote control- (1) (2)
ler. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System
Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System EXAMPLE 64MS133
Transmitter” in this section. (1) Tailgate unlatch switch
• If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless 61MM0A046
(2) Request switch (if equipped)
push start system, you can also lock or (1) Lock position
unlock all doors by pushing the request (2) Unlock position Vehicle with keyless entry system
switch. Refer to “Keyless Push Start Sys- You can lock and unlock the tailgate by
tem Remote Controller/Keyless Entry Sys- Each of the rear doors is equipped with a using the driver’s door lock key.
tem Transmitter” in this section. child-proof lock which can be used to help To open the tailgate, push and hold the tail-
NOTE: prevent unwanted opening of the door gate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.
• All doors are automatically unlocked when from inside the vehicle. When the lock Vehicle with keyless push start system
you turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” lever is in the lock position (1), the rear You can lock or unlock the tailgate by
position and pull out the key, or press the door can only be opened from outside. pushing the request switch (2), when the
engine switch to change the ignition mode When the lock lever is in the unlock posi- keyless push start system remote control-
to LOCK (OFF). tion (2), the rear door can be opened from ler is within the switch’s operating range.
• All doors are automatically locked for safety inside or outside. For details refer to “Keyless Push Start
when the vehicle speed reaches 15 km/h. System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry
• You can change the automatic locking or WARNING System Transmitter” in this section.
unlocking function mentioned above via the
Be sure to place the child-proof lock To open the tailgate push the tail gate
setting mode of the information display. For
in the lock position whenever chil- unlatch switch (1) and lift the tail gate to
details on how to use the information dis-
dren are seated in the rear. open the trunk lid.
play, refer to “Information Display” in this
section. The tail gate unlatch switch (1) operates
only to open the tail gate.

2-4

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

When all the doors are closed and if the using a flat blade screwdriver or the Keyless Push Start System Remote
keyless push start remote controller is left jack handle. The tailgate will be latched Controller/Keyless Entry System
in the trunk, the tail gate will be automati- again by closing the tailgate simply. Transmitter
cally unlatched.
EXAMPLE
NOTE: Type A Type B
When the tailgate is closed incompletely,
follow the procedure below:
1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and
open the tailgate.
2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.
3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed
completely.

WARNING (2)

Always make sure that the tailgate is

closed and latched securely. Com- 68LM246
pletely closing the tailgate helps pre- If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by push- 64MS022
vent occupants from being thrown ing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-
from the vehicle in the event of an inspected by your authorised Maruti less push start system remote controller
accident. Completely closing it also Suzuki workshop. (Type A) or a keyless entry system trans-
helps keep exhaust gases from enter- mitter (Type B). The remote controller has
ing the vehicle. CAUTION a keyless entry system and a keyless push
• To avoid injury, do not use your fin- start system. The transmitter has only a
If you cannot unlatch the tailgate by push- keyless entry system. For details, refer to
ing the unlatch switch (1) due to a dis- ger to push the emergency lever.
• Make sure there is no one near the the following explanations.
charged battery or malfunction, follow the
procedures below to unlatch the tailgate tailgate when pushing open the tail-
from inside the vehicle. gate from inside the vehicle.
1) Remove the luggage compartment
cover (if equipped) and fold the rear
seat forward for easier access. Refer to
“Folding Rear Seats” section for details
on how to fold the rear seat forward.
2) Push open the tailgate from inside by
pushing up on the emergency lever (2)

2-5

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Keyless Push Start System Remote Central door locking system

WARNING Controller (Type A) • To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but-
ton (1) once.
Radio waves from the keyless push The remote controller enables the follow- • To unlock only the driver’s door, push the
start system antenna(s) may interfere ing operations: “UNLOCK” button (2) once.
with operation of electrical medical • You can lock or unlock the doors by
equipment such as pacemakers. Fail- • To unlock other doors, push the
operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons “UNLOCK” button (2) once again.
ure to take the precautions listed on the remote controller. Refer to the
below can increase the risk of severe explanation in this section.
injury or death due to radio wave NOTE:
• You can lock or unlock the doors by You can switch the function that unlocks all
interference. pushing the request switch. For details,
• Anyone who uses electrical medi- doors from twice operations to once opera-
refer to the explanation in this section. tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode
cal equipment such as a pace-
maker should consult the medical • You can start the engine without using of the information display. For details on
equipment supplier or their medical an ignition key. For details, refer to how to use the information display, refer to
advisor about whether radio waves “Engine Switch” in the “OPERATING “Information Display” in this section.
from the antenna(s) can interfere YOUR VEHICLE” section.
with the medical equipment. The turn signal lights will flash once and
• If radio wave interference is a con- the siren will sound once when the doors
cern, have the function of the are locked.
antenna(s) disabled by your autho- (2)
(2) When the doors are unlocked:
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop. • The turn signal lights will flash twice and
the siren will sound twice.
(1)
(1) • If the interior light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the interior light will
turn on for about 15 seconds and then
fade out. If you press the engine switch
during this time, the light will start to fade
out immediately.
Be sure the doors are locked after you
68LM206
operate the “LOCK” button (1).
If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
(1) Lock button onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) is
(2) Unlock button operated, the doors will automatically lock
You can lock or unlock all doors (including again.
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating
the remote controller near the vehicle.

2-6

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: • When any door is open, if you push the Keyless unlocking/locking using the
• If you lock the doors using the remote “LOCK” button on the remote controller, request switches
controller when the engine hood is open, the exterior buzzer will sound and doors
the siren will sound 3 times to remind cannot be locked.
you. • If you lose one of the remote controllers,
• If the security system was triggered due ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle shop as soon as possible for a replace-
and then you unlock the doors using the ment. Be sure to have your dealer
remote controller, the siren will sound 4 program the new remote controller code
times to remind you. If this happens, in your vehicle’s memory so that the old
check whether your vehicle has been code is erased.
broken into while you were away from it.
• Once you push both of the “LOCK” but- Car locator function
ton (1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), then This function helps in locating the vehicle.
you push one of the buttons within 5 sec- Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and (1)
onds, the siren will not sound. However, “UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 sec- EXAMPLE
If you push one of the buttons twice onds. The turn signal lights will blink for 64MS134
within 5 seconds, or push one of the but- about 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will
tons 5 seconds later, the siren will When the remote controller is within the
sound for about 27.5 seconds at the same operating range described in this section,
sound. time.
• You can set whether the siren sounds you can lock or unlock the doors (including
To cancel the car locator function, press the tailgate) by pushing the request switch
when locking or unlocking the door(s) via any button (LOCK OR UNLOCK). You can
the setting mode of the information dis- (1) on the driver’s door handle, front pas-
also change the ignition mode to ON to senger’s door handle or tailgate.
play. For details on how to use the infor- cancel the car locator function.
mation display, refer to “Information To lock all doors when all doors are
Display” in this section. NOTE: unlocked:
The car locator function will not activate • To lock all doors, push one of the
NOTE:
when the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON” or request switches once.
• The maximum operating distance of the
remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.), pre warning / full blast warning by shock The turn signal lights will flash once and
but this can vary depending on the sur- sensor or alarm is in activated condition. the siren will sound once when the doors
roundings, especially near other trans- are locked.
mitting devices such as radio towers or
CB (Citizen’s Band) radios. To unlock a door or all doors:
• The door locks cannot be operated with • Push one of the request switches once
the remote controller if the ignition mode to unlock only one door.
is other than the LOCK (OFF). • Push one of the request switches twice
to unlock all doors.

2-7

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: mation display, refer to “Information When the remote controller is within
You can switch the function that unlocks all Display” in this section. approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a
doors from twice operations to once opera- NOTE: front door handle or the tailgate switch, you
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode • The door locks cannot be operated by can lock or unlock the doors by pushing
of the information display. For details on the request switch under the following the request switch.
how to use the information display, refer to conditions:
“Information Display” in this section. NOTE:
– If any door is open or is not completely • If the remote controller is outside the
When the doors are unlocked: closed. request switch operating range
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and – If the ignition mode is other than described above, you will not be able to
the siren will sound twice. LOCK (OFF). operate the request switch.
• If no doors are opened within about 30
• If the interior light switch is in the door seconds after unlocking the doors by • If the battery of the remote controller
position, the interior light will turn on for pushing the request switch, the doors runs down or there are strong radio
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If will be locked again automatically. waves or noise, the request switch oper-
you press the engine switch during this ating range may be reduced or the
time, the light will start to fade out imme- NOTICE remote controller may be inoperative.
diately. • If the remote controller is too close to the
Be sure the doors are locked after you • Do not operate request switch with door glass, the request switches may not
operate the request switch to lock the sharp metal object. operate.
doors. • Do not use high pressure water on • If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-
request switch. cle, the request switches may not oper-
NOTE: ate normally.
• If you lock the doors using the request • The remote controller will only operate a
switch when the engine hood is open, EXAMPLE
the siren will sound 3 times to remind request switch if it is within the switch’s
you.
(1) operating range. For example, if the
• If the security system was triggered due remote controller is within the operating
to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle range of the driver’s door request switch
and then you unlock the doors using the (1) but not the front passenger’s door
request switch, the siren will sound 4 request switch or the tailgate request
times to remind you. If this happens, switch, the driver’s door switch can be
check whether your vehicle has been operated but the front passenger’s door
broken into while you were away from it. (1) switch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-
• You can set whether the siren sounds ated.
when locking or unlocking the door(s) via • Avoid operations of switch with sharp
the setting mode of the information dis- 80J056 objects.
play. For details on how to use the infor-
(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)

2-8

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

• Be sure that the driver always carries the

NOTICE remote controller.
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,
The remote controller is a sensitive ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
electronic instrument. To avoid dam- shop as soon as possible for a replace-
aging the remote controller: ment. Be sure to have your dealer (A)
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois- program the new remote controller code
ture or high temperature such as in your vehicle’s memory so that the old
by leaving it on the dashboard code is erased.
under direct sunlight. • You can use up to four remote control-
• Keep the remote controller away lers and the keys for your vehicle. Ask
from magnetic objects such as a your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
television. for details.
• The battery life of the remote controller 68LM247
NOTE: is about two years, but it can vary
The keyless push start system may not depending on usage conditions. To remove the key from the remote control-
function correctly in certain environments ler, push the button (A) in the direction of
or under certain operating conditions such the arrow and pull the key out from the
as the following: remote controller.
• When there are strong signals coming
from a television, power station or a cel-
lular phone.
• When the remote controller is in contact
with or covered by a metal object.
• When a radio wave type remote keyless
entry is used nearby.
• When the remote controller is placed
near an electronic device such as per-
sonal computer.
Some additional precautions you should 57L21016
take and information you should be aware To stow the key into the remote controller,
of are: push the key in the remote controller until
• Make sure the key is stowed in the you hear a click.
remote controller. If the remote controller
becomes unreliable, you will not be able
to lock or unlock the doors.

2-9

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Request switch warning buzzer Reminder function pushing the power door locking switch,
the driver’s door will be automatically
This exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 sec- unlocked.
onds in the following conditions to warn
you that the request switch is not working: • If you open the front passenger’s door
• The request switch is pressed after all and lock the door by turning the lock
doors are closed with the ignition mode knob forward or pushing the power door
changed to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing locking switch, the front passenger’s
the engine switch. door will be automatically unlocked.
• The request switch is pressed in any of
the following conditions after changing NOTE:
the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by • The reminder will not operate when the
pressing the engine switch. remote controller is on the instrument
– The remote controller is left inside the panel, in the glove box, in a storage
vehicle. EXAMPLE compartment, in the sun visor or on the
– Any door (including the tailgate) is 64MS165 floor etc.
open. • Be sure that the driver always carries the
Press the request switch again after doing If the remote controller is not in the vehicle remote controller.
the following: under the following conditions, the buzzer • Do not leave the remote controller in the
With the ignition mode changed to “LOCK” sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds vehicle when leaving the vehicle.
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bring and the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
out the remote controller if it is inside the tem warning light on the instrument cluster
vehicle and check that all doors are com- blinks:
pletely closed. When one or more doors are opened and
all of the doors are later closed with the
ignition mode is other than “LOCK”.

The indicator light will turn off within sev-

eral seconds after the remote controller is
returned to an area of the vehicle other
than the rear luggage area.

If the remote controller is left in the vehicle

and you lock the driver’s door or front pas-
senger’s door as described below, the door
will be automatically unlocked.
• If you open the driver’s door and lock the
door by turning the lock knob forward or

2-10

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Replacement of the battery

NOTICE
If the remote controller becomes unreli-
able, replace the battery. The remote controller is a sensitive
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-
aging it, do not expose it to dust or
NOTICE moisture or tamper with internal parts.
When replacing the battery, do not
(1) NOTE:
touch the electronic component in the
remote controller with wet or oil- Used batteries must be disposed properly
stained hands. Otherwise, the remote according to applicable rules or regulations
controller may be damaged. and must not be disposed with ordinary
household trash.
To replace the battery of the remote con-
troller:
68LM210

(1) Lithium disc type battery:

CR2032 or equivalent
3) Replace the battery (1) so its + terminal
faces the bottom of the case as shown
in the illustration.
4) Close the remote controller firmly.
5) Make sure the door locks can be oper-
ated with the remote controller.
6) Dispose of the used battery properly
according to applicable rules or regula-
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-
ies with ordinary household trash.
71LMT0201
WARNING
1) Pull the key out from the remote con-
troller. Swallowing a lithium battery may
2) Insert a flat blade screwdriver covered cause serious internal injury. Do not
with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote allow anyone to swallow a lithium
controller and pry it open. battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.

2-11

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Keyless Entry System Transmitter Central door locking system NOTE:

(Type B) • To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but- If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
ton (1) once. onds after the unlock button (2) is oper-
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the ated, the doors will automatically lock
“UNLOCK” button (2) once. again.
• To unlock other doors, push the
NOTE:
“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.
(For models with security system)
NOTE: • If you lock the doors using the transmit-
You can switch the function that unlocks all ter when the engine hood is open, the
doors from twice operations to once opera- siren will sound 3 times to remind you.
tion, and vice versa, via the setting mode • If the security system was triggered due
of the information display. For details on to an unauthorized entry into the vehicle
(1) how to use the information display, refer to and then you unlock the doors using the
(2) “Information Display” in this section. transmitter, the siren will sound 4 times
to remind you. If this happens, check
The turn signal lights will flash once and whether your vehicle has been broken
76MS011 the siren (if your vehicle is equipped with into while you were away from it.
(1) “Lock” button the security system) will sound once when • Once you push both of the “LOCK” but-
(2) “Unlock” button the doors are locked. ton (1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), then
You can lock or unlock all doors (including When the doors are unlocked: you push one of the buttons within 5 sec-
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating • The turn signal lights will flash twice and onds, the siren will not sound. However,
the transmitter near the vehicle. the siren (if your vehicle is equipped with If you push one of the buttons twice
the security system) will sound twice. within 5 seconds, or push one of the but-
• If the interior light switch is in the tons 5 seconds later, the siren will
“DOOR” position, the interior light will sound.
turn on for about 15 seconds and then • You can set whether the siren sounds
fade out. If you insert the key into the when locking or unlocking the door(s) via
ignition switch during this time, the light the setting mode of the information dis-
will start to fade out immediately. play. For details on how to use the infor-
mation display, refer to “Information
Be sure the doors are locked after you Display” in this section.
operate the lock button (1).

2-12

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: Car locator function (if equipped) Replacement of the battery

• The maximum operating distance of the This function helps in locating the vehicle. If the transmitter becomes unreliable,
keyless entry system transmitter is about Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and replace the battery.
5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending “UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 sec-
on the surroundings, especially near onds. The turn signal lights will blink for NOTICE
other transmitting devices such as radio about 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will
towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios. sound for about 27.5 seconds at the same When replacing the battery, do not
• The door locks cannot be operated with time. touch the electronic component in
the transmitter with wet or oil-stained
the transmitter, if the ignition key is To cancel the car locator function, press hands. Otherwise, the transmitter
inserted in the ignition switch. any button (LOCK or UNLOCK). You can may be damaged.
• When any door is open, the door locks also turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
can be operated only by unlocking with position to cancel the car locator function. To replace the battery of the transmitter:
the transmitter. With this unlocking oper-
NOTE:
ation, the turn signal lights will flash
The car locator function will not activate
twice and the siren (if your vehicle is
when the key is in the ignition switch or pre
equipped with the security system) will (1)
warning / full blast warning by shock sen-
sound twice.
sor or alarm is in activated condition.
• If you lose one of the transmitters, ask (2)
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
as soon as possible for a replacement.
Be sure to have your dealer program the
new transmitter code in your vehicle’s
memory so that the old code is erased.

NOTICE
The transmitter is a sensitive elec- 68LM248
tronic instrument. To avoid damaging
the transmitter: 1) Remove the screw (1), and open the
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois- transmitter cover.
ture or high temperature such as 2) Remove the transmitter (2).
by leaving it on the dashboard
under direct sunlight.
• Keep the transmitter away from
magnetic objects such as a televi-
sion.

2-13

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

9) Dispose of the used battery properly Security System (if equipped)

according to applicable rules or regula-
The security system is armed after you
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-
(2) lock all doors (including the engine hood
ies with ordinary household trash.
and tailgate) by using the keyless entry
(3) system transmitter, keyless push start sys-
WARNING tem remote controller or request switch.
Swallowing a lithium battery may Once the system is armed, any attempt to
cause serious internal injury. Do not open a door by using any other means (*)
allow anyone to swallow a lithium than the keyless entry system transmitter,
(4) battery. Keep lithium batteries away keyless push start system remote control-
from children and pets. If swallowed, ler or request switch, or open the engine
contact a physician immediately. hood, will cause the alarm to be triggered.
64MS197 * These means include the following:
– The key
(4) Lithium disc type battery: NOTICE – The lock knob on a door
CR1620 or equivalent
The transmitter is a sensitive elec- – The central door locking switch
3) Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriver
in the slot of the transmitter (2) and pry tronic instrument. To avoid damaging Also, in case that you have set the shock
it open. it, do not expose it to dust or mois- sensor to enabled state and set sensitivity
4) Hold the cover around the electric com- ture or tamper with internal parts. of the pre-warning function and full blast
ponent (3), insert a precision screw- warning function to a level other than 0, the
driver covered with insulating tape in NOTE: warning will be triggered if any attempt is
the space between the cover and the Used batteries must be disposed properly made to tamper with the vehicle. The
component, and then remove the com- according to applicable rules or regulations shock sensor can be selected to enabled
ponent. and must not be disposed with ordinary or disabled state, and sensitivity of each
5) Replace the battery (4) so its + terminal household trash. warning can be adjusted as desired. To set
faces the “+” mark of the transmitter. the shock sensor, ask your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop or use the setting
Insert the battery all the way into the mode of the information display.
holder.
6) Close the transmitter and install it into NOTE:
the transmitter holder. • The default setting of the shock sensor
7) Close the transmitter cover, install and is in the disabled state. Set to the
tighten the screw (1). enabled state and adjust sensitivity of
8) Make sure the door locks can be oper- each warning according to your prefer-
ated with the transmitter. ence. For details on how to use the infor-

2-14

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

mation display, refer to “Information How to arm the security system the central door locking switch from
Display” in this section. Lock all doors (including the engine hood inside.
• Your dealer may have already set the and tailgate) using the keyless entry sys- • If any door is not operated within approx-
shock sensor of the vehicle to the tem transmitter, keyless push start system imately 30 seconds after the doors have
enabled state before you purchase it. remote controller or request switch. been unlocked using the keyless entry
Consult your dealer for further informa- When the system is armed, the indicator system transmitter, keyless push start
tion. continues to blink at intervals of approxi- system remote controller or request
mately 2 seconds. switch, the doors are automatically
NOTE: locked again. When the doors are
• The security system generates alarms locked, the security system will be
when any of the predetermined condi- armed.
tions is met. However, the system does • If the security system indicator (1) blinks
not have any function of blocking unau- when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
thorized entry into the vehicle. position or the ignition mode is “ON”,
• Always use the keyless entry system there may be something wrong with the
transmitter, keyless push start system security system. Ask your authorised
remote controller or request switch to Maruti Suzuki workshop to inspect the
unlock the doors when the security sys- system.
tem has been armed. Using a key (1)
instead will trigger the alarm. How to disarm the security system
• If a person who does not know the secu- Simply unlock the doors using the keyless
rity system is going to drive the vehicle, EXAMPLE entry system transmitter, keyless push
we recommend you explain the system start system remote controller or request
and its operation to the person. Mistak- 61MM0A134 switch. The security system indicator will
enly triggering the alarm may cause a NOTE: go out, indicating that the security system
nuisance to others. • To prevent the alarm from being acci- is disarmed.
• Even if the security system is armed, dentally triggered, avoid arming it while How to stop the alarm
you should still be careful to guard anyone remains inside the vehicle. The Should the alarm be triggered accidentally,
against theft. Do not leave money or alarm will be triggered if any person unlock the doors using the keyless entry
things of value in the vehicle. inside opens the door, tailgate, engine system transmitter, keyless push start sys-
hood, or warning may be triggered if tem remote controller or request switch, or
anyone swings the vehicle (if the shock in case of emergency, insert the key in the
sensor is in the enabled state). ignition switch and turn it to “ON” position,
• The security system is not armed when or press the engine switch to change the
all doors are locked using the key from ignition mode to “ON”. The alarm will then
outside, or using the door lock knobs or stop.

2-15

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: Security system indication Windows

• Even after the alarm has stopped, if you • If any of the doors are opened without
lock the doors using the keyless entry unlocking by the keyless entry system Electric Window Controls
system transmitter, keyless push start transmitter, keyless push start system The electric windows can only be operated
system remote controller or request remote controller or request switch, all when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
switch, the security system will be turn signal lights start to blink and the position or the ignition mode is ON.
rearmed. interior buzzer beeps intermittently. After
• If you disconnect the battery while the 5 seconds, the siren will sound for about Driver’s side
security system is in the armed condition 27.5 seconds. The security system indi- EXAMPLE
or the alarm is actually in operation, the cator continues to blink during this time.
alarm will be re-triggered when the bat- • If the engine hood is opened, all turn sig- (1)
tery is then reconnected. nal lights blink, and the siren sounds for (4)
• Even after the alarm has stopped at the about 27.5 seconds. The security sys-
end of the predetermined operation time, tem indicator continues to blink during
it will be triggered again if any of the this time.
doors, tailgate or engine hood is opened, • If the shock sensor is in enabled state
or the warning may be triggered if the and the vehicle feels a shock higher than
vehicle feels a shock (if the shock sen- the pre-warning sensitivity, the siren
sor is in the enabled state), without dis- sounds for about 2 seconds (pre-warn-
arming the security system. ing). If the vehicle feels a shock higher
than full blast warning sensitivity, siren
(2) (3)
Checking whether the alarm has been will sound for about 4.5 seconds (full
triggered during parking blast warning). The security system indi-
If the alarm was triggered and you then 64MS025
cator continues to blink during this time.
turn the ignition switch to “ON” position, or The driver’s door has a switch (1) to oper-
press the engine switch to change the igni- NOTE: ate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) to
tion mode to “ON”, the security system If you set the full blast warning sensitivity operate the front passenger’s window or
indicator will blink rapidly for about 8 sec- higher than the pre-warning sensitivity in there are switches (3), (4), to operate the
onds and a buzzer will beep 4 times during the setting mode of the information display, rear left and right passenger windows,
this period. If this happens, check whether or the vehicle feels such shock as to be respectively.
the vehicle has been broken into while you able to trigger the full blast warning, the full
were away from it. blast warning will be triggered preferen-
tially. In this case, the pre-warning will not
be triggered.

2-16

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Passenger’s door The driver’s window has auto-down and

auto-up features for added convenience WARNING
EXAMPLE (at toll booths or drive-through restaurants,
for example). This means the driver can • You should always lock the pas-
open or close the window without holding senger’s window operation when
the window switch in the down or up posi- there are children in the vehicle.
tion. Press down or lift up the driver’s win- Children can be seriously injured if
(5) dow switch completely and release it. To they get part of their body caught
stop the window before it reaches the full- by the window during operation.
down or full-up position, pull up or push • To avoid injuring an occupant by
down the switch briefly. window entrapment, be sure no
part of the occupant’s body such as
Lock switch hands or head is in the path of the
electric windows when closing
EXAMPLE them.
• Always remove the ignition key or
64MS026 take the keyless push start system
remote controller with you when
The passenger’s door has a switch (5) to leaving the vehicle even if only for
operate the passenger’s window. a short time. Also do not leave chil-
dren alone in a parked vehicle.
Unattended children may operate
the electric window switches and
CLOSE get trapped by the window.

NOTE:
64MS027 If you drive with one of the rear windows
OPEN open, you may hear a loud sound caused
The driver’s door also has a lock switch for
by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open
the passenger’s window(s). When you
the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or
push in the lock switch, the passenger’s
narrow the rear window opening.
window(s) cannot be raised or lowered by
81A009 operating any of the switches (2), (3), (4)
To open a window, push the top part of the or (5). To restore normal operation, release
switch and to close the window lift up the the lock switch by pushing again.
top part of the switch.

2-17

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Pinching Prevention Function NOTE:

The driver’s window is equipped with the
Even if you cannot close the window by the WARNING
auto-up feature because there may be
pinching prevention function. The function something wrong with the pinching preven- Whenever you disconnect and recon-
detects a foreign object caught in the win- tion function, you can close the window by nect the battery or replace the fuse,
dow while being closed by the “auto-up” the pinching prevention function
holding the window switch in the up posi- needs to be initialized.
feature, which you can close the window tion.
without holding the window switch in the The pinching prevention function will
If you drive in extreme off-road condition, not be activated until the initialization
“UP” position, and stops the window clos- the pinching prevention function may oper-
ing to prevent damage. complete.
ate accidentally because the window react
to vehicle jolting. If the auto-down/up feature would not work
WARNING after initialization, there might be some-
The Pinching Prevention Function Ini-
To avoid injuring an occupant by win- tialization thing wrong with the pinching prevention
dow entrapment, be sure no part of When you disconnect and re-connect the function. Have your vehicle inspected by
the occupant’s body such as hands battery or replace the fuse, the function will an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
or head is in the path of the electric be deactivated. In this condition, the auto-
window when closing it. down feature will be deactivated, while the
The function may not detect the auto-up feature may remain being acti-
object depending on size, hardness, vated. The pinching prevention function
and position of the object caught by needs to be initialized.
the closing window. To initialize the pinching prevention func-
tion, use the following procedure:
CAUTION 1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position or press the engine switch to
• The pinching prevention function change the ignition mode to “ON”.
does not act while you are holding 2) Open the driver’s window fully by hold-
the window switch in the “UP” ing the window switch in the “DOWN”
position. position.
• The pinching prevention function 3) Close the driver’s window by holding
may not detect an object caught in the switch in the “UP” position, and
the window just before the window keep holding the switch for 2 seconds
is fully closed. after the window fully closed.
4) Check the driver’s window if the auto-
down/up feature work.

2-18

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Mirrors Auto Dimming Rearview Mirror

WARNING (if equipped)
Inside Rearview Mirror • Always adjust the mirror with the
selector set to the day position.
• Only use the night position if it is
necessary to reduce glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you.
Be aware that in this position you
may not be able to see some
objects that could be seen in the (1) (2)
68LMT0205 day position.

57L30019
(1)
You can adjust the auto dimming rearview
(2) (3) mirror by hand so you can see to the rear
of your vehicle in the mirror. This rearview
68LMT0206 mirror has a function of automatically
(2) Day driving reducing glare from the lights of vehicles
(3) Night driving behind you. The function works when the
ignition mode has been changed to “ON”
You can adjust the inside rearview mirror by pressing the engine switch.
by hand so as to see the rear of your vehi- • The mirror is always set to the automatic
cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set dimming mode when the engine switch
the selector tab (1) to the day position, is in the “ON” mode.
then move the mirror up, down or sideways • When the “AUTO” switch (2) is pushed,
by hand to obtain the best view. the green indicator (1) is lit, indicating
When driving at night, you can move the that the mirror is set to the automatic
selector tab to the night position to reduce dimming mode. To cancel the automatic
glare from the headlights of vehicles dimming mode, push the “AUTO” switch
behind you. (2); the indicator (1) then goes out.
• The auto dimming rearview mirror is
automatically deactivated while the gear-
shift lever is in the “R” position.

2-19

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Outside Rearview Mirrors 3) Return the selector switch to the center

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you position to help prevent unintended
can just see the side of your vehicle in the adjustment.
mirrors.
Outside Rearview Mirrors Folding
WARNING Switch (if equipped)
(3) Be careful when judging the size or EXAMPLE
(3) distance of a vehicle or other object (1)
seen in the side convex mirror. Be
aware that objects look smaller and
appear farther away than when seen
in a flat mirror.

57L30020 (1)
(3)
(2)
WARNING
Do not touch or cover the sensor (3) (4)
(1)
since this may impair normal opera- 64MS029
tion of the system. Blocking glare (2) L R (3)
from the sensor with an object such You can fold the mirrors when you park the
as a shade, sticker, accessory or bag- (4) vehicle in a narrow space. When the igni-
gage may also impair proper opera- tion switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position,
tion of the system. 64MS028 or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”,
push the folding switch (1) to fold and
The switch to control the electric mirrors is unfold the mirrors. Make sure the mirrors
NOTICE located on the driver’s door panel. You can are completely unfolded before you start
Do not hook anything heavy on the adjust the mirrors when the ignition switch
is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, or the igni- driving.
mirror, or the mirror may break under
tion mode is “ACC” or “ON”. To adjust the
the weight. mirrors: CAUTION
1) Move the selector switch to the left or Moving mirrors can pinch and injure
right to select the mirror you wish to a hand. Do not allow any one’s hand
adjust. to get near the mirrors when folding
2) Press the outer part of the switch that and unfolding the mirrors.
corresponds to the direction in which
you wish to move the mirror.

2-20

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s
seat or seatback while driving. The
seat or seatback could move unex-
pectedly, causing loss of control.
Make sure that the driver’s seat and
seatback are properly adjusted
before you start driving.

WARNING
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
which reduces the effectiveness of
the seat belts as a safety device,
make sure that the seats are adjusted
before the seat belts are fastened.

WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an
upright position when driving, or seat
belt effectiveness may be reduced.
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi- (2)
mum protection when seatbacks are (1)
in the upright position. (3)

64MS154

2-21

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Seat position adjustment lever (1) Head Restraints Front

Pull the lever up and slide the seat.
EXAMPLE
Seatback angle adjustment lever (2)
Pull the lever up and move the seatback.
Seat height adjustment lever (3) (if
equipped)
Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push the
lever down to lower the seat.
After adjustment, try to move the seat and
seatback forward and rearward to ensure
that it is securely latched.

80J001
64MS163
Head restraints are designed to help To raise the front head restraint, pull
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case upward on the restraint until it clicks. To
of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to lower the restraint, push down on the
the position which places the center of the restraint while holding in the lock lever. If a
head restraint closest to the top of your head restraint must be removed (for clean-
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas- ing, replacement, etc.), push in the lock
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high lever and pull the head restraint all the way
as possible. out.
WARNING
• Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed.
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to recline the seat-
back to provide enough overhead clear-
ance to remove the head restraint.

2-22

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Rear Seats
EXAMPLE
Seat Adjustment
WARNING
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
which reduces the effectiveness of
the seat belts as a safety device, (1)
make sure that the seats are adjusted LOCK
before the seat belts are fastened.

WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an
upright position when driving, or seat
belt effectiveness may be reduced.
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-
mum protection when seatbacks are RED
UNLOCK
in the upright position.

64MS155

2-23

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Seatback angle adjustment lever (1) Rear Folding Rear Seat (s)
(if equipped)
EXAMPLE The rear seat (s) of your vehicle can be
Pull the lever up and move the seatback. folded forward to provide additional cargo
After adjustment, try to move the seatback space.
forward and rearward to ensure that it is
securely latched. To fold the rear seat (s) forward:
1) Lower the head restraint fully.
CAUTION
After securing the rear seatback, EXAMPLE
make sure that it is locked securely. If
it is not, red will appear beside the
lever.
64MS156
Head Restraints
To raise the rear head restraint, pull
Head restraints are designed to help upward on the restraint until it clicks. To
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case lower the restraint, push down on the
of an accident. restraint while holding in the lock lever. If a
head restraint must be removed (for clean-
WARNING ing, replacement, etc.), push in the lock
• Never drive the vehicle with the lever and pull the head restraint all the way
head restraints removed. out. 64MS157
• Do not attempt to adjust the head When installing a child restraint system,
restraint while driving. 2) Pull the release lever on the top of each
raise the head restraint to the most upper split seat, and fold the seatback (s) for-
NOTE: position. ward.
It may be necessary to fold forward the
seatback to provide enough overhead NOTICE
clearance to remove the head restraint.
After folding the rear seatback for-
Adjust the head restraint to the position ward, do not allow any foreign mate-
which places the center of the head rial to enter the lock opening. This
restraint closest to the top of your ears. If may cause damage to the inside of the
this is not possible for very tall passengers, lock and prevent the seatback from
adjust the head restraint as high as possi- being locked securely.
ble.

2-24

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

After returning the seat, try to move the

WARNING EXAMPLE seatback forward and rearward to ensure
LOCK that it is securely latched.
If you need to carry cargo in the pas-
senger compartment with the rear
seat back folded forward, be sure to CAUTION
secure the cargo or it may be thrown Do not put your hand into the rear
about, causing injury. Never pile seatback lock opening, or your finger
cargo higher than the seatbacks. UNLOCK may get caught and be injured.
RED
To return the seat to the normal position,
follow the procedure below. CAUTION
CAUTION After securing the rear seatback,
make sure that it is locked securely. If
When returning the rear seatback to 64MS145
it is not, red will appear beside the
the normal position, be careful that Raise the seatback until it locks into place. release lever.
your finger is not caught between the
lock and the striker. EXAMPLE
(3)
NOTICE
When returning the rear seatback to
the normal position, make sure that (2)
(1)
there is nothing around the striker.
Any foreign materials prevent the
seatback from being locked securely.

64MS201

The rear seatback (3) will lock in two posi-

tions (1) and (2). You can lock the rear
seatback in position (2) to increase the lug-
gage compartment area.

2-25

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Seat Belts and Child Restraint

NOTICE
Systems
• When returning the rear seatback
to the normal position, do not allow
any foreign material to enter the
lock opening. This may prevent the
seatback from being locked
securely. Above the pelvis
• When returning the rear seatback
to the normal position, be sure to
handle it carefully by hand to avoid
any damage to the lock itself. Do
not push it by using some material
or by applying excessive force.
65D606
• As the lock is designed exclusively
for securing the rear seatback, do
not use it for any other purpose. 65D231S WARNING
Incorrect use of it may cause dam-
age to the inside of the lock and • Never allow persons to ride in the
prevent the seatback from being WARNING cargo area of a vehicle. In the event
locked securely. of an accident, there is a much
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times. greater risk of injury for persons
who are not riding in a seat with
WARNING their seat belt securely fastened.
• Seat belts should always be
An air bag supplements, or adds to, adjusted as follows:
the frontal crash protection offered – the lap portion of the belt should
by seat belts. The driver and all pas- be worn low across the pelvis,
sengers must be properly restrained not across the waist.
by wearing seat belts at all times, – the shoulder straps should be
whether or not an air bag is mounted worn on the outside shoulder
at their seating position, to minimize only, and never under the arm.
the risk of severe injury or death in – the shoulder straps should be
the event of a crash. away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder.
(Continued)

2-26

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING
(Continued)
• Never use the same seat belt on
more than one occupant and never
as low as possible attach a seat belt over an infant or
across the hips child being held on an occupant’s
Across the pelvis lap. Such seat belt use could cause
serious injury in the event of an
accident.
• Periodically inspect seat belt
assemblies for excessive wear and
damage. Seat belts should be
65D201 65D199
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated, or damaged
in any way. It is essential to replace
WARNING WARNING the entire seat belt assembly after it
(Continued) (Continued) has been worn in a severe impact,
• Seat belts should never be worn • Pregnant women should use seat even if damage to the assembly is
with the straps twisted and should belts, although specific recommen- not obvious.
be adjusted as tightly as is com- dations about driving should be • Children age 12 and under should
fortable to provide the protection made by the woman’s medical advi- ride properly restrained in the rear
for which they have been designed. sor. Remember that the lap portion seat.
A slack belt will provide less pro- of the belt should be worn as low • Infants and small children should
tection than one which is snug. as possible across the hips, as never be transported unless they
• Make sure that each seat belt shown in the diagram. are properly restrained. Restraint
buckle is inserted into the proper • Do not wear your seat belt over systems for infants and small chil-
buckle catch. It is possible to cross hard or breakable objects in your dren can be purchased locally and
the buckles in the rear seat. pockets or on your clothing. If an should be used. Make sure that the
(Continued) accident occurs, objects such as system you purchase meets appli-
glasses, pens, etc. under the seat cable safety standards. Read and
belt can cause injury. follow all the directions provided
(Continued) by the manufacturer.
(Continued)

2-27

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Lap-Shoulder Belt
WARNING Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
(Continued) The seat belt has an emergency locking Low on hips
• For children, if the shoulder belt retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock
irritates the neck or face, move the the seat belt only during a sudden stop or
child closer to the center of the impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt
vehicle. across your body very quickly. If this hap-
• Avoid contamination of seat belt pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, then
webbing by polishes, oils, chemi- pull the belt across your body more slowly.
cals, and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out Safety reminder
using mild soap and water. Sit up straight and
• Do not insert any items such as fully back
coins, clips, etc. into the seat belt 60A040
buckles, and be careful not to spill
liquids into these parts. If foreign To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt
Low on hips
materials get into a seat belt during a collision, position the lap portion
buckle, the seat belt may not work of the belt across your lap as low on your
properly. hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit
• All seatbacks should always be in by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt
an upright position when driving, upward through the latch plate. The length
or seat belt effectiveness may be of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself
reduced. Seat belts are designed to to allow freedom of movement.
offer maximum protection when
seatbacks are in the upright posi- 60A038
tion.

2-28

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

All Seat Belts Except Rear Center Rear Center Seat Belt
All seat belts except rear center are the
lap-shoulder belt. Rear center seat belt is the lap belt.
To fasten the belt, pull the latch plate
attached to the seat belt across your hips
and press it straight into the buckle until
you hear a click. To reduce the risk of slid-
ing under the belt during a collision, posi-
tion the belt across your lap as low on your
hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit.

TO TIGHTEN

60A039

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button

on the buckle and retract the belt slowly Low on hips
60A036 while attaching a hand to the belt or/and
To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and the latch plate.
well back in the seat, pull the latch plate
attached to the seat belt across your body
and press it straight into the buckle until
you hear a click.
80JS028

To tighten the belt, pull the free end of the

belt across alongside the lap strap.

2-29

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: 1. The driver’s seat belt reminder light will

TO LOOSEN To identify the center seat belt buckle and come on.
latch plate in the rear seat, “CENTER” is 2. After the vehicle’s speed has reached
marked on the buckle and latch plate of the about 15 km/h, the driver’s seat belt
center lap belt. The buckles are designed reminder light will blink and a buzzer
so a latch plate cannot be inserted into the will sound for about 95 seconds.
wrong buckle. 3. After step 2) has finished, the reminder
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder light will remain on until the driver’s seat
belt is buckled.
EXAMPLE (1)
If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt
Right angle
and later unbuckles the seat belt, the seat
belt reminder system will be activated from
80JS029 step 1) or step 2) according to vehicle’s
To lengthen, release the latch plate from speed. When the vehicle’s speed is below
the buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) in about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from
the direction of the arrow, at right angles to step 1). When the vehicle’s speed is above
the belt. The latch plate should then be about 15 km/, the reminder will start from
refitted into the buckle and the belt tight- step 2).
ened as previously described.
To unfasten the belt, press the release but- The reminder will be automatically can-
ton on the buckle catch.
64MS045 celed when the driver’s seat belt is buckled
(1) Driver’s seat belt reminder light or the ignition switch is turned off, ignition
mode is switched to OFF position.
When the driver doesn’t buckle his or her
seat belt, with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position or the ignition mode “ON”, WARNING
the driver’s seat belt reminder light in the
instrument cluster will blink and a buzzer It is absolutely essential that the
will sound as a reminder to the driver to driver and passengers wear their seat
buckle his or her sear belt. For more belts at all times. Persons who are
details, refer to the explanation below. not wearing seat belts have a much
greater risk of injury if an accident
If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” ling your seat belt before putting the
position or the ignition mode is “ON”, the key in the ignition or pressing the
reminder works as follows: engine switch.
80JS031

2-30

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster Seat Belt Inspection Child Restraint Systems

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

65D209S
64J198 Periodically inspect the seat belts to make
sure they work properly and are not dam- 60G332S
Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that
the shoulder belt rides on the center of the aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch Infant restraint - rear seat only
outboard shoulder. To move upward, slide plates, retractors, anchorages, and guide
the anchor up. To move downward, slide loops. Replace any seat belts which do not EXAMPLE
work properly or are damaged.
the anchor down while pulling the lock
knob out. After adjustment, make sure that
the anchor is securely locked. WARNING
Be sure to inspect all seat belt
WARNING assemblies after any collision. Any
seat belt assembly which was in use
Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi- during a collision (other than a very
tioned on the center of the outside minor one) should be replaced, even
shoulder. The belt should be away if damage to the assembly is not
from your face and neck, but not fall- obvious. Any seat belt assembly
ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment which was not in use during a colli-
of the belt could reduce the effective- sion should be replaced if it does not
ness of the safety belt in a crash. function properly, it is damaged in
80JC007

any way or the seat belt pretension-

ers were activated (that is, if the front
air bags were activated).

2-31

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Child restraint All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by either seat WARNING
EXAMPLE belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-
shoulder belts). MARUTI SUZUKI recom- If you install a child restraint system
mends that child restraint systems be in the rear seat, slide the front seat
installed on the rear seat as per the Child far enough forward so that the child’s
Restraint System table in this section. feet do not touch the front seatback.
According to accident statistics, children This will help avoid injury to the child
are safer when properly restrained in rear in the event of an accident.
seating positions than in front seating posi-
tions.
NOTE:
Observe any statutory regulation about
80JC016
child restraints.
Booster seat
EXAMPLE

65D608

58MS030

80JC008 WARNING
MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends that Do not install a rear-facing child
you use a child restraint system to restrain restraint in the front passenger’s
infants and small children. Many different seat. If the passenger’s front air bag
types of child restraint systems are avail- inflates, a child in a rear-facing child
able; make sure that the restraint system restraint could be killed or severely
you select meets applicable safety stan- injured. The back of a rear-facing
dards. child restraint would be too close to
the inflating air bag. 65D609

2-32

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Install your child restraint system accord-
WARNING Belts ing to the instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
Children could be endangered in a Make sure that the seat belt is securely
crash if their child restraint systems NOTICE
latched.
are not properly secured in the vehi- Before installing a child restraint sys- Try to move the child restraint system in all
cle. When installing a child restraint tem in the rear seat, raise the head directions to make sure it is securely
system, be sure to follow the instruc- restraint to the most upper position. installed.
tions below. Be sure to secure the
child in the restraint system accord- NOTE: Installation with a Lap Belt
ing to the manufacturer’s instruc- If the most upper position head restraint
tions. interferes a child restraint system and pre- EXAMPLE
vents the child restraint system from being
installed securely, remove the head
WARNING restraint.
In an accident or sudden stop, the Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-
Pull to tighten
rear seat armrest (if equipped) could gage compartment so it will not inconve-
fall forward. If there is a child in a nience the occupants.
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
ELR type belt
center seating position, the falling 60G132
armrest could injure the child. Do not EXAMPLE
install a rear-facing child restraint in Install your child restraint system accord-
ing to the instructions provided by the child
the rear center seating position. restraint system manufacturer.
To lengthen or tighten the belt, refer to the
“Lap-belt” item in this “Seat Belts and
Child Restraint Systems” section. After
making sure that the seat belt is securely
latched, try moving the child restraint sys-
tem in all directions, to make sure it is
securely installed. If you need to tighten
the belt, pull the free end of the webbing.

80JC021

2-33

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Installation with ISOFIX type Install the ISOFIX type child restraint sys- Here is a general instruction:
anchorages (if equipped) tem according to the instructions provided
by the child restraint system manufacturer. CAUTION
After installation, try moving the child
restraint system in all directions especially Adjust the height of the rear head
forward to check that connecting bars are restraint or remove it for fitting the
securely latched to the anchorages. child restraint, as necessary. How-
ever, if a booster cushion not
equipped with the head restraint is
EXAMPLE fitted, the rear seat head restraint
should not be removed. If the rear
head restraint is removed for fitting
the child restraint, you need to install
it again after removing the child
restraint.
EXAMPLE If the child restraint is fitted improp-
erly, a child sitting in it could be
64MM02001
injured in a crash.
Your vehicle is equipped with the lower
anchorages in the rear seat outboard seat- NOTE:
ing positions for securing a ISOFIX type of Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-
child restraints with the connecting bars. gage compartment so it will not cause
84MM00252
The lower anchorages are located where inconvenience to the occupants.
the rear of the seat cushion meets the bot- Your vehicle is equipped with the top tether
tom of the seatback. anchorages. Use the top tether strap of the
child restraint according to the instructions
WARNING provided by the child restraint system man-
ufacturer.
Install the ISOFIX type of child
restraint(s) in the only outboard seat-
ing positions, not in the central posi-
tion for the rear seat.

2-34

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

2) Use your hands to carefully align the

EXAMPLE connecting bar tips with the anchor- EXAMPLE
ages. Take care not to pinch your fin-
gers.

EXAMPLE

78F114 54G185

1) Place the child restraint in the rear seat, 4) Grasp the front of the child restraint and
inserting the connecting bars to the push the child restraint forcefully to
anchorages between the seat cushion latch the connecting bars. Check that
54G184
and the seatback. they are securely latched by trying to
3) Push the child restraint toward the anchor- move the child restraint system in all
EXAMPLE ages so that the connecting bar tips are directions, especially forward.
partially hooked to the anchorages. Use 5) Attach the top tether strap referring to
your hands to confirm the position. “Installation of child restraint with top
tether” section below.
When you put your child in the child
restraint system, appropriately slide the
front seat forward not to touch a part of
your child’s body.

NOTICE
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem to the rear seat, adjust the front
68LM268
seat position so that the front seat
does not interfere with the child
restraint system.

2-35

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Installation of child restraint with 1) Remove the luggage compartment cover

top tether (if equipped) (if equipped). EXAMPLE
2) Secure the child restraint on the rear
EXAMPLE seat using the procedure described
Front above for securing a restraint system
that does not require a top tether strap.
3) Hook the top tether strap to the top
tether anchorage bracket and tighten
the top tether strap according to the
instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer. Attach
the top tether strap to the correspond-
ing top tether anchorage bracket
located directly behind the child
restraint. Do not attach the top tether 54P000264
strap to the luggage restraint loops (if 4) When routing the top tether strap, pass
68PM00247 equipped). the top tether strap as shown in the
Some child restraint systems require the illustration. (Refer to “Head restraints”
use of a top tether strap. Top tether anchor- WARNING section for details on how to remove the
age brackets are provided in your vehicle at Do not attach the child restraint top head restraint.)
the locations shown in the illustrations. tether strap to the luggage restraint 5) Check that cargo does not interfere
The number of the top tether anchorage loops (if equipped). Incorrectly with routing of the top tether strap.
brackets provided in your vehicle depends attached top tether strap will reduce
on the vehicle specification. Install the child the intended effectiveness of the NOTICE
restraint system as follows: child restraint system. When installing a child restraint sys-
tem to the rear seat, adjust the front
seat position so that the front seat
does not interfere with the child
restraint system.

NOTE:
Maruti Suzuki recommends use of Maruti
Suzuki Genuine accessory of “Child seat,
ISOFIX”.

2-36

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Child Restraint System for India

Child Restraint
The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below.
Whenever you carry children up to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which conform to AIS 072, the standard for child
restraints, referring to the table.

Seating position (or other site)

MASS GROUP Front Rear Rear Intermediate Intermediate
Passenger Outboard Centre Outboard Centre

Group 0 X U X N.A. N.A.

Up to 10 kg
Group 0+ X U X N.A. N.A.
Up to 13 kg
Group I X U X N.A. N.A.
9 to 18 kg
Group II X U X N.A. N.A.
15 to 25 kg
Group III X U X N.A. N.A.
22 to 36 kg

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:

U =Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass group
X =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
N.A = Seat position not available for children in this mass group.
NOTE: ‘universal’ is the category in the AIS 072.
: ‘Outboard’ indicates window side seat.

2-37

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Seat Belt Pretensioner System the pretensioner seat belts in the same minimize the risk of severe injury or death
(if equipped) manner as ordinary seat belts. in the event of a crash.
Read this section and the “Supplemental Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do
EXAMPLE Restraint System (air bags)” section to not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the
and/or learn more about the pretensioner system. belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn
low across the pelvis, not across the waist.
The seat belt pretensioner system works Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” sec-
with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT tion and the instructions and precautions
SYSTEM (Air Bags). The crash sensors about the seat belts in this “Seat Belts and
and the electronic controller of the air bag Child Restraint Systems” section for details
system also control the seat belt preten- on proper seat and seat belt adjustments.
sioners. The pretensioners are triggered Please note that the pretensioners along
only when there is a frontal crash severe with the air bags will activate in severe
enough to trigger the air bags and the seat frontal collisions. They are not designed to
Label belts are fastened. For precautions and activate in side impacts, rear impacts, roll-
general information including servicing the overs, or minor frontal collisions. The pre-
pretensioner system, refer to the “Supple- tensioners can be activated only once. If
63J269 mental Restraint System (air bags)” sec- the pretensioners are activated (that is, if
tion in addition to this “Seat Belt the air bags are activated), have the pre-
Pretensioner System” section, and follow
WARNING all those precautions.
tensioner system serviced by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as
This section of the owner’s manual The pretensioner is located in each front possible.
describes your Vehicle’s SEAT BELT seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-
PRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Please ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu- If the air bag light on the instrument cluster
read and follow ALL these instruc- pant’s body more snugly in the event of a does not blink or come on briefly when the
tions carefully to minimize your risk frontal crash. The retractors will remain ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
of severe injury or death. locked after the pretensioners are acti- tion or the engine switch is pressed to
vated. Upon activation, some noise will change the ignition mode to ON, stays on
To determine if your vehicle is equipped occur and some smoke may be released. for more than 10 seconds, or comes on
These conditions are not harmful and do while driving, the pretensioner system or
with a seat belt pretensioner system at the the air bag system may not work properly.
front seating positions, check the label on not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
The driver and all passengers must be Have both systems inspected by an autho-
the front seat belt at the bottom part. If the rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as
letters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illus- properly restrained by wearing seat belts possible.
trated, your vehicle is equipped with the at all times, whether or not a pretensioner
seat belt pretensioner system. You can use is equipped at their seating position, to Service on or around the pretensioner sys-
tem components or wiring must be per-
formed only by an authorised Maruti

2-38

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Suzuki workshop who is specially trained.

Improper service could result in unin-
tended activation of pretensioners or could
render the pretensioner inoperative. Either
of these two conditions may result in per-
sonal injury.
To prevent damage or unintended activa-
tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-
tery is disconnected and the ignition switch
has been in the “LOCK” position or the
ignition mode has been LOCK (OFF) for at
least 90 seconds before performing any
electrical service work on your vehicle. Do
not touch pretensioner system compo-
nents or wiring. The wires are wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the
couplers are yellow. When scrapping your
Vehicle, ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop body repair shop, or scrap yard
for assistance.

2-39

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Supplemental Restraint System

EXAMPLE
(air bags) (if equipped)
WARNING 2
This section of the owner’s manual
describes the protection provided by
your Vehicle’s SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).
Please read and follow ALL these
instructions carefully to minimize
your risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a collision. 3 4 5
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-
1
mental Restraint System consisting of the
following components in addition to a lap-
shoulder belt at each seating position.
1. Driver’s front air bag module (if
equipped) 3
2. Front passenger’s front air bag mod-
ule (if equipped)
3. Seat belt pretensioners (if equipped)
4. Air bag controller
5. Forward crash sensor (if equipped)

76MH026

2-40

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING
Air bag symbol (if equipped) meaning Front Air Bags (if equipped)
An air bag supplements, or adds to, EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
the crash protection offered by seat
belts. The driver and all passengers
must be properly restrained by wear-
ing seat belts at all times, whether or
not an air bag is mounted at their
seating position, to minimize the risk
of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
AIR BAG light 63J113
72M00150
Front air bags are designed to inflate in
You may find this label on the sun visor. severe frontal collisions when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position or the ignition
WARNING mode is ON.
NEVER use a rearward facing child Front air bags are not designed to inflate in
restraint on a seat protected by an rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH minor frontal collisions, since they would
63J030
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD offer no protection in those types of acci-
If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus- can occur. dents. Remember, since an air bag
ter does not blink or come on when the deploys only one time during an accident,
ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” seat belts are needed to restrain occu-
position, or the ignition mode is first pants from further movements during the
changed to “ON”, or the air bag light stays accident.
on, or comes on while driving, the air bag
system (or the seat belt pretensioner sys- Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute
tem (if equipped) may not work properly. for seat belts. To maximize your protection,
Have the air bag system inspected by an ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as aware that no system can prevent all pos-
soon as possible. sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

2-41

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Driver’s front air bag (if equipped) The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into Conditions of front air bags deployment
the air bag covers to identify the location of (inflation)
EXAMPLE the air bags.

80J097

• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall that

does not move or deform at vehicle
61M0020 speed of more than about 25 km/h (15
mph)
Front passenger’s front air bag
(if equipped) 58MS030

EXAMPLE WARNING
(1)

Do not install a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the passenger’s front air bag (1)
inflates, a child in a rear-facing child
restraint could be killed or severely
injured. The back of a rear-facing 80J098E
child restraint would be too close to • In collisions such as above at an angle
the inflating air bag. of about 30 degrees (1) or less from the
Please refer to the “Seat Belts and Child front
Restraint Systems” section in this section Conditions of front air bags may inflate
64MS117 for details on securing your child. Receiving a strong impact to the lower
The driver’s front air bag is located behind body of your vehicle, the front air bags will
the center pad of the steering wheel and inflate in many cases.
the front passenger’s front air bag is
located behind the passenger’s side of the
dashboard.

2-42

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Front air bags may inflate in a strong Front air bags may not inflate
impact The front air bags may not inflate when the
impact is absorbed since the collision
object moved, vehicle body deformed, or
collision angle was greater than about 30
degrees from the front.

80J099

• Hitting a curb or medial strip 80J120

• Collision from the rear

80J102

• Approximately 50 km/h (30 mph) or

lower speed frontal collision to a stopped
vehicle

80J100E

• Falling into a deep hole or ditch 80J119

• Collision from the side

80J103

• Collision in which front of your vehicle

goes under the bed of a truck etc.

80J110
80J101 • Vehicle rollover
• Landing hard or falling

2-43

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

speed of less than about 25 km/h (15 How the System Works
mph)
In a frontal collision, the crash sensors will
detect rapid deceleration, and if the control-
ler judges that the deceleration represents
a severe frontal crash, the controller will
trigger the inflators. The inflators inflate the
appropriate air bags with nitrogen or argon
gas. The inflated air bags provide a cushion
80J104
80J107
for your head and upper body. The air bag
• Collision with a utility pole or stumpage inflates and deflates so quickly that you
• Offset collision between two vehicles. may not even realize that it has activated.
The air bag will neither hinder your view nor
(1) make it harder to exit the vehicle.
Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully
in order to reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable con-
sequence of the quick inflation is that the air
bag may irritate bare skin, such as the facial
area against a front air bag. Also, upon
80J105E inflation, a loud noise will occur and some
powder and smoke will be released. These
• Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail at conditions are not harmful and do not indi-
an angle of greater than about 30 cate a fire in the vehicle. Be aware, how-
degrees (1) from the front ever, that some air bag components may be
hot for a while after inflation.
A seat belt helps keep you in the proper
position for maximum protection when an
air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle. Sit fully back in your seat; sit up
straight; do not lean over the steering wheel
or dashboard. Front occupants should not
80J106 lean on or sleep against the door. Please
refer to the “Front Seat” section and the
• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall that “Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems”
does not move or deform at vehicle section in this section for details on proper
seat and seat belt adjustments.

2-44

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Note that even though your vehicle may be tended air bag deployment or could render
moderately damaged in a collision, the col- the air bag inoperative. Either of these two
lision may not have been severe enough to conditions may result in severe injury.
trigger the front air bags to inflate. If your To prevent damage or unintended inflation
vehicle sustains ANY front-end damage, of the air bag system, be sure the battery
have the air bag system inspected by an is disconnected and the ignition switch has
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to been in the “LOCK” position or the ignition
ensure it is in proper working order. mode has been LOCK (OFF) for at least
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic 90 seconds before performing any electri-
module which records information about cal service work on your Vehicle. Do not
the air bag system if the air bags deploy in touch air bag system components or wires.
a crash. The module records information The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or
about overall system status, which sensors yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow
activated the deployment.
for easy identification.
65D610 Servicing the air bag system Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflated
If the air bags inflate, have the air bags air bag can be hazardous. Ask your autho-
and related components replaced by an rised Maruti Suzuki body repair shop or
WARNING scrap yard for help with disposal.
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as
• The driver should not lean over the soon as possible.
steering wheel. The front passen- If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and
ger should not rest his or her body the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag
against the dashboard, or other- controller could be damaged. If it does,
wise get too close to the dash- have the air bag system inspected by the
board. In these situations, the out- authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop as
of-position occupant would be too soon as possible.
close to an inflating air bag, and Special procedures are required for servic-
may suffer severe injury. ing or replacing an air bag. For that rea-
• Do not attach any objects to, or son, only an authorised Maruti Suzuki
place any objects over, the steering workshop should be allowed to service or
wheel or dashboard. Do not place replace your air bags. Please remind any-
any objects between the air bag one who services your Vehicle that it has
and the driver or front passenger. air bags.
These objects may interfere with air
bag operation or may be propelled Service on or around air bag components
by the air bag in the event of a or wiring must be performed only by an
crash. Either of these conditions authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
may cause severe injury. Improper service could result in unin-

2-45

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Instrument Cluster
1. Speedometer
2. Tachometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Temperature gauge
5. Information display
6. Warning and indicator lights

2 6 1

6 4 5 3 6

64MS166

2-46

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Speedometer Fuel Gauge The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler lid
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. is located on the left side of the vehicle.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute.

NOTICE
Never drive the vehicle with the
engine revving in the red zone or
severe engine damage can result.
Keep the engine speed below the red (2)
zone even when downshifting to a
(1)
lower gear position. EXAMPLE
Refer to “Downshifting maximum 61MM0A154
allowable speeds” in the “OPERAT-
ING YOUR VEHICLE” section. When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position or the ignition mode is “ON”, this
gauge gives an approximate indication of
the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. “F”
stands for full and “E” stands for empty.
If the indicator gets off the graduation of
“E” (not character “E”), refill the tank as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
The indicator moves a little depending on
road conditions (for example, slope or
curve) and driving conditions because of
fuel moving in the tank.
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,
fill the fuel tank immediately.
Refer to “Low Fuel Warning Light” in
“Warning and Indicator Lights” in this
section for details.

2-47

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Temperature Gauge Brightness Control

WARNING
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE If you attempt to adjust the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights
while driving.
NOTE:
(1)
• If you do not turn the knob for more than
5 seconds while activating the bright-
61MM0A156 ness control, the brightness control dis-
play will be canceled automatically.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
64MS046 • When you reconnect the battery, the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” pressed to change the ignition mode to
will be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-
position or the ignition mode is “ON”, this “ON”, the instrument cluster lights come
ness according to your preference.
gauge indicates the engine coolant tem- on.
perature. Under normal driving conditions, NOTE:
Your vehicle has a system to automatically
the indicator should stay within the normal, If you select the high brightness level when
dim the brightness of the instrument panel
acceptable temperature range between the position lights or headlights are on, the
lights when the position lights or headlights
“H” and “C”. If the indicator approaches instrument panel lights are not dimmed.
are on.
“H”, overheating is indicated. Follow the
instructions for engine overheating in the You can change the brightness of the
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section. instrument panel lights regardless of
whether the position lights or headlights
NOTICE are off or on.
Continuing to drive the vehicle when To increase the brightness of the instru-
engine overheating is indicated can ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec-
result in severe engine damage. tor knob (1) clockwise.
To reduce the brightness of the instrument
panel lights, turn the indicator selector
knob (1) counterclockwise.

2-48

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Information Display Display (A) Clock

Clock
The information display is shown when the The display (A) shows the time.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position or the Display (B)
ignition mode is ON. Thermometer To set the clock, follow the “Setting mode”
instructions in this section.
Display (C)
Warning and indicator messages / Thermometer
Fuel consumption / Driving range / The display (B) shows the thermometer.
(A) (B)
Average speed
The thermometer indicates the outside
Display (D) temperature.
(C) Trip meter
Display (E)
Odometer
(D)
(E)
(1)
64MS183

(1) Information display

61MM0A160

(3) EXAMPLE If the outside temperature nears freezing,

the message shown in the above illustra-
(2) 64MS181 tion will appear on the display.
When the ignition switch is turned to the NOTE:
“ON” position or the engine switch is The outside temperature indication is not
pressed to change the ignition mode to the actual outside temperature when driv-
ON, the message shown in the above illus- ing at low speed, or when stopped.
tration will appear on the display for sev-
eral seconds.
64MS184 Some warning and indicator messages
may appear on the display when the igni-
(2) Indicator selector knob
tion switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-
(3) Trip meter selector knob
tion, or the ignition mode is ACC or LOCK
The information display shows the follow- (OFF).
ing information.

2-49

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Fuel Consumption / Driving Range / Average Speed NOTE:

The value of fuel consumption, driving
When there are no warning or indicator messages on the display (C), you can select one range and average speed shown in the
of the following indications to appear on the display: instantaneous fuel consumption, display are affected by conditions such as
average fuel consumption, driving range, average speed or no indication. the following;
• road condition
(a) (b) (c) • surrounding traffic condition
• driving condition
• vehicle condition
• a malfunction which causes the malfunc-
tion indicator light to come on or blink

EXAMPLE (e) (d)

64MS058

(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption

(b) Average fuel consumption
(c) Driving range
(d) Average speed
(e) No indication
To switch the display indication, push the indicator selector knob (2) quickly.

2-50

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Instantaneous fuel consumption position or the engine switch is pressed to Driving range
The display shows instantaneous fuel con- change the ignition mode to “ON”. Unless If you selected driving range the last time
sumption with a bar graph only when the you reset the value of average fuel con- you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
vehicle is moving. sumption, the display indicates the value of “---” for a few seconds and then indicates
average fuel consumption which includes the current driving range when the ignition
NOTE: average fuel consumption during previous switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
• The display does not show the bar graph driving. engine switch is pressed to change the
unless the vehicle is moving. ignition mode to ON.
• Depending on the vehicle’s specification, NOTE:
the fuel consumption units of initial set- When you reconnect the negative (–) ter- The driving range shown in the display is
ting are indicated as L/100km, km/L or minal to the battery, the value of average the approximate distance you can drive
MPG. fuel consumption will be shown after driv- until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on
• For “L/100km” or “km/L” setting, the indi- ing for a period of time. current driving conditions.
cated maximum value of instantaneous
You can select when the value of average When the low fuel warning light comes on,
fuel consumption is 30. No more than 30
fuel consumption is reset from among the the display “---” will appear.
will be indicated on the display even if
following three methods; If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
the actual instantaneous fuel consump-
• Reset after refuel: the value of average the fuel tank immediately.
tion is higher.
fuel consumption will be reset automati-
• For “MPG” setting, the indicated maxi- As the driving range after refueling is cal-
cally by refueling.
mum value of instantaneous fuel con- culated based on the most recent driving
• Reset with trip A: the value of average
sumption is 80. No more than 80 will be condition, the value is different each time
fuel consumption will be reset automati-
indicated on the display even if the you refuel.
cally by resetting trip meter A.
actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
• Reset manually: the value of average NOTE:
higher.
fuel consumption will be reset by push- • If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
• The indication on the display may be
ing and holding the indicator selector the “ON” position or the ignition mode is
delayed if fuel consumption is greatly
knob (2) when the display indicates the “ON”, the driving range may not indicate
affected by driving conditions.
average fuel consumption. the correct value.
• The display shows estimated values.
To change when the value of average fuel • When you reconnect the negative (–)
Indications may not be the same as
consumption is reset, refer to “Setting terminal to the battery, the value of driv-
actual values.
Mode” later in this section. ing range will be shown after driving for a
Average fuel consumption period of time.
NOTE:
If you selected average fuel consumption
If you add only a small amount of fuel
the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-
when you select “Reset after refuel”, the
play shows the last value of average fuel
average fuel consumption value may not
consumption from previous driving when
be reset.
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

2-51

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Average Speed Odometer

If you selected average speed the last time EXAMPLE
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates The display (E) shows the odometer.
the last value of average speed from The odometer records the total distance
previous driving when the ignition switch is the vehicle has been driven.
turned to the “ON” position or the engine
switch is pressed to change the ignition NOTICE
mode to “ON”. Unless you reset the value
of average speed, the display indicates the Keep track of your odometer reading
value of average speed which includes and check the maintenance sched-
average speed during previous driving. ule regularly for required services.
To reset the value of average speed, push Increased wear or damage to certain
and hold the indicator selector knob (2) for parts can result from failure to per-
about 2 seconds when the display indicates form required services at the proper
an average speed. The display shows “---” mileage intervals. 61MM0A161
and then indicates a new average speed
after driving for a short time. Setting Mode NOTE:
The currently selected setting item is indi-
NOTE: When the ignition switch is in the “ON” cated enclosed by a frame.
When you reconnect the negative (–) ter- position or the ignition mode is ON and the NOTE:
minal to the battery, the value of average vehicle is stationary, you can enter the set- • If you push and hold the indicator selec-
speed will be shown after driving for a ting mode of the information display by tor knob (2) to enter the setting mode
period of time. pushing and holding the indicator selector when the display (D) shows average fuel
knob (2) for more than 3 seconds. consumption or average speed, the
Trip Meter value will be reset simultaneously. If you
• To select the setting that you want to
The display (D) shows the trip meter. change, turn the indicator selector knob do not want to reset the value, push the
(2) left or right. indicator selector knob quickly to switch
The trip meter can be used to measure the
• To change the setting, push the indicator the indication of the display.
distance traveled on short trips or between
selector knob (2). • If you turn the ignition switch, press the
fuel stops.
• To exit the setting mode, select “Back” engine switch or start to move the vehi-
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B
and push the indicator selector knob (2). cle when the display is in the setting
independently.
mode, the setting mode will be canceled
To reset the trip meter to zero, push and automatically.
hold the trip meter selector knob (3) for
about 2 seconds when the display shows
the trip meter.

2-52

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Distance unit Set Sensors Door Lock (Door lock setting)

(Odo/trip meter distance units setting) (Parking sensors (if equipped) setting) • Door Unlock
You can change the units odo/trip meter The parking sensor can be switched • All Doors:
distance is displayed in. between the normal mode and trailer Unlock all doors by turning the key, or
mode. operating the keyless entry system
NOTE: transmitter, keyless push start system
When you change the units odo/trip meter Clock setting remote controller or request switch once
distance is displayed in, the trip meter will • To change the hour indication, turn the • Driver Door:
be reset automatically. indicator selector knob (2) left or right Unlock all doors by turning the key, or
repeatedly when the hour indication operating the keyless entry system
Fuel economy appears as reversed color. To change
(Fuel consumption units setting) transmitter, keyless push start system
the hour indication quickly, turn and hold remote controller or request switch twice
You can change the units that fuel con- the indicator selector knob (2). To set the
sumption is displayed in. (default setting)
hour indication, push the indicator selec-
Language tor knob (2) and the minute indication • Auto Lock
You can change the language of the infor- appears as reversed color. • Manual Lock:
mation display. • To change the minute indication, turn the Disable the automatic door locking func-
indicator selector knob (2) left or right tion
Fuel reset (Average fuel consumption repeatedly when the minute indication • Speed Syncro:
reset setting) appears as reversed color. To change Lock all doors when the vehicle speed
You can change when the value of aver- the minute indication quickly, turn and reaches 15 km/h (default setting)
age fuel consumption is reset. hold the indicator selector knob (2). To
• Auto Unlock
Temperature set the minute indication, push the indi-
• Syncro Off:
(Temperature units setting) cator selector knob (2).
Disable the automatic door unlocking
You can change the units that temperature You can also switch the time indication function (default setting for the vehicle
is displayed in. between 12-hour and 24-hour format. with the keyless push start system)
NOTE: • IG-OFF Sync:
When you change the units that tempera- Unlock all doors when the key is pulled
ture is displayed in, the automatic heating out from the ignition switch or the engine
and air conditioning system (if equipped) switch is pressed to change the ignition
temperature display units will be changed mode to LOCK (OFF) (default setting for
automatically. the vehicle without the keyless push
start system)

2-53

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

• Alarm Anti theft Warning and Indicator Messages

You can turn off or on the siren sound
• Shock Sensor The display shows warning and indicator
when the door(s) is (are) locked or
You can switch the shock sensor from the messages to let you know about certain
unlocked. disabled state to the enabled state, and vehicle problems.
vice versa. (default setting is disabled A tone may also sound to alert you.
Lights (Light setting) state)
• Foot Lights (Foot well lights setting) If warning and indicator messages appear
• Shock Sens P on the display, follow the messages.
(if equipped) You can adjust the pre-warning sensitivity of
The foot well lights can be programmed for shock sensor. (default setting level is 14) Master warning indicator light
interlocked operation with either lighting • Shock Sens F
control or door operation and for no light- You can adjust the full blast warning sensi-
ing. (default setting is door operation) tivity of shock sensor. (default setting level
• Lane Change is 9)
(Turn signal lights setting)
The turn signal and its indicator can be set Default (initialization setting)
whether they flash three times even if you If you select “Yes” and push the indicator
return the turn signal control lever immedi- selector knob (2), all settings will be reini- 78K049
ately after moving it. (default setting is tialized. When the display shows warning and indicator
enabled state) messages, the master warning indicator light
may also blink.

NOTE:
• When the problem that causes a message to
appear is corrected, the message will disap-
pear.
• If a message is displayed, and other prob-
lems requiring a message occur, the mes-
sage for each of the problems will be
alternately displayed about every 5 seconds.
• When you push and hold the indicator selec-
tor knob (2) for about 2 seconds while a mes-
sage is displayed, the message will
disappear temporarily. If the problem that
caused the message is not corrected, the
message will appear again after 5 seconds.

2-54

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator messages

Warning and Indicator Master Warning
Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Blinks
(only while vehicle is in motion)

Beep (one time from interior buzzer; only while vehicle is in motion)
A door or tailgate is not properly closed. Stop in a safe place and close the door or tailgate properly.
(#1)
61MM0A162

64MS182

2-55

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Keyless Push Start System Off Off This message is displayed when the ACC
position is selected as the power supply
position. (#1)

61MM0A163

Keyless Push Start System Off Off The clutch pedal is depressed. Press the
engine switch to start the engine.

61MM0A164

(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.

2-56

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Keyless Push Start System Off Off The engine switch is pressed without
depressing the brake and clutch pedals. Try
again as instructed by the message.

WARNING
Engine can be started only after
depressing the clutch pedal. How-
ever, before depressing the clutch
61MM0A166 pedal make sure that the transaxle is
in Neutral and brake pedal is
depressed.

Keyless Push Start System Blinks Beep (one time from interior There is a problem with the steering lock
buzzer) system.
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

61MM0A168

Keyless Push Start System Blinks Beep (one time from interior There is a problem with the steering lock
buzzer) system.
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

61MM0A168

2-57

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Keyless Push Start System Blinks Series of beeps under cer- The remote controller may be outside the
tain conditions (for about 2 vehicle or its battery may have become dis-
seconds from exterior and/or charged. Locate the remote controller or
interior buzzers) touch the engine switch with the remote
controller.
If the message still appears, replace the
remote controller battery.

61MM0A170

61MM0A171

2-58

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Blinks Continuous beep (from inte- The headlights and/or the position lights are
rior buzzer) left on. Turn them off.

61MM0A172

Keyless Push Start System Off Off This message is displayed when the ON
position is selected as the power supply
position. (#1)

61MM0A173

(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.

2-59

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Off Off The road may be icy. Drive very carefully.
(#1)

61MM0A176

Keyless Push Start System Off Off The remote controller battery is about to
become flat. Replace the battery. (#1)

61MM0A177

Blinks Beep (one time from interior There may be a problem with the fuel filter.
buzzer) Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

61MM0A225

(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.

2-60

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and Indicator Master Warning

Sound Cause and Remedy
Message Indicator Light
Blinks Beep (one time from interior There is a possibility to have water in the
buzzer) fuel filter.
Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

61MM0A226

Blinks Beep (one time from interior If this message is displayed, have your
buzzer) vehicle inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

61MM0A180

NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a parking sensor system, the information display also indicates warning and indicator messages related
to the system. For information on these messages, refer to “Parking Sensors” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

2-61

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and Indicator Lights If your vehicle is equipped with the ABS,
NOTE:
the brake system warning light also comes WARNING
on together with the ABS warning light
If warning and indicator lights blink or If any of the following conditions
when the rear brake force control function
come on, the corresponding messages occur, you should immediately ask
(proportioning valve function) of the ABS
may be shown on the information display. your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
system fails.
shop to inspect the brake system.
Brake System Warning Light If the brake system warning light comes on • If the brake system warning light
while you are driving the vehicle, it may does not go out after the engine
mean that there is something wrong with has been started and the parking
the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens, brake has been fully released.
you should: • If the brake system warning light
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully. does not come on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the engine switch is
65D477 WARNING pressed to change the ignition
Three different types of operations exist Remember that stopping distance mode to “ON”.
depending on the vehicle’s specification. may be longer, you may have to push • If the brake system warning light
harder on the pedal, and the pedal comes on at any time during vehi-
1) The light comes on briefly when the may go down farther than normal. cle operation.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the engine switch is pressed 2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and NOTE:
to change the ignition mode to “ON”. stopping on the shoulder of the road. Because the brake system is self-adjust-
2) The light comes on when the parking 3) If you determine that it is safe, drive ing, the fluid level will drop as the brake
brake is engaged with the ignition cautiously at low speed to the nearest pads become worn. Replenishing the
switch in the “ON” position or the igni- dealer for repairs or have the vehicle brake fluid reservoir is considered normal
tion mode “ON”. towed to the nearest dealer for repairs. periodic maintenance.
3) The light comes on when under either
or both of above two conditions. NOTE:
(Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer)
The light also comes on when the fluid in A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
the brake fluid reservoir falls below the you to release the parking brake if you
specified level. start the vehicle without releasing the park-
The light should go out after starting the ing brake. Make sure that the parking
engine and fully releasing the parking brake is fully released and the brake sys-
brake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid tem warning light turns off.
reservoir is adequate.

2-62

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) there may be something wrong with both Oil Pressure Light
Warning Light (if equipped) the rear brake force control function and
anti-lock function of the ABS system.
If one of these happens, have the system
inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake
system will function as an ordinary brake
system that does not have this ABS sys-
tem. 50G051A
65D529
For details of ABS system, refer to “Anti- This light comes on when the ignition
When the ignition switch is turned to the Lock Brake System (ABS)” in the “OPER- switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
“ON” position or the engine switch is ATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. engine switch is pressed to change the
pressed to change the ignition mode to ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when
“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you can the engine is started. The light will come
check that the light is working. on and remain on if there is insufficient oil
If the light stays on, or comes on when pressure. If the light comes on when driv-
driving, there may be something wrong ing, pull off the road as soon as you can
with the ABS. and stop the engine.
Check the oil level and add oil if necessary.
If this happens: If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys-
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully. tem should be inspected by your autho-
2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” or rised Maruti Suzuki workshop before you
change the ignition mode to “LOCK” drive the vehicle again.
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch
and then start the engine again.
NOTICE
If the warning light comes on briefly then
• If you operate the engine with this
turns off, the system is normal. If the warn-
light on, severe engine damage can
ing light still stays on.
result.
If the light and the brake system warning • Do not rely on the oil pressure light
light stay on, or come on simultaneously to indicate the need to add oil. Be
when driving, your ABS system is sure to periodically check the
equipped with the rear brake force control engine oil level.
function (proportioning valve function) and

2-63

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Charging Light Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light Air Bag Light

50G052
63J030
60G049
This light comes on when the ignition This light blinks or comes on for several
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the When the driver doesn’t buckle his or her seconds when the ignition switch is turned
engine switch is pressed to change the seat belt, this light will come on and/or to the “ON” position or the engine switch is
ignition mode to “ON”, and goes out when blink. pressed to change the ignition mode to
the engine is started. The light will come For details about the seat belt reminder, “ON” so you can check if the light is work-
on and remain on if there is something refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint ing.
wrong with the battery charging system. If Systems” in this section.
the light comes on when the engine is run- The light will come on and stay on if there
ning, the charging system should be is a problem in the air bag system or the
inspected immediately by your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop. seat belt pretensioner system (if
equipped).

WARNING
If the AIR BAG light does not blink or
come on briefly when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to ON,
stays on for more than 10 seconds,
or comes on while driving, the air bag
system or the seat belt pretensioner
system (if equipped) may not work
properly. Have both systems
inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

2-64

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Malfunction Indicator Light Immobilizer/Keyless Push Start Low Fuel Warning Light
System Warning Light

65D530 54G343

Your vehicle has a computer-controlled If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank
emission control system. A malfunction 80JM122 immediately.
indicator light is provided on the instrument
panel to indicate when it is necessary to When the ignition switch is turned to the When this light comes on, a ding sounds
have the emission control system serviced. “ON” position or the engine switch is once to remind you to fill the fuel.
The malfunction indicator light comes on pressed to change the ignition mode to If you do not fill the fuel, a ding sounds
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON, the light comes on briefly so you can every time when the ignition switch is
“ON” position or the engine switch is check that the light is working. If this light turned to the “ON” position or the engine
pressed to change the ignition mode to stays on, there is a problem with the sys- switch is pressed to change the ignition
“ON” to let you know the light is working tem. Ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki mode to ON.
and goes out when the engine is started. workshop to have the system inspected. NOTE:
If the malfunction indicator light comes on Open Door Warning Light The activation point of this light varies
or blinks when the engine is running, there depending on road conditions (for exam-
is a damage in the emission control sys- ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions
tem. because of fuel moving in the tank.
Bring the vehicle to your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop to have the damage
fixed.

NOTICE 54G391
Continuing to drive the vehicle when This light remains on until all doors (includ-
the malfunction indicator light is on ing the tailgate) are completely closed.
or blinking can cause permanent
damage to the vehicle’s emission If any door (including the tailgate) is open
control system, and can affect fuel when the vehicle is moving, a ding sounds
economy and driveability. to remind you to close all doors completely.

2-65

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Electric Power Steering Light However, repeating these operations could “SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)
cause damage to the power steering sys-
tem.
NOTE:
If the power steering system does not work
properly, you will feel heavier to steer but
you still will be able to steer.
NOTE: 65D474
79J039
If the steering is operated, you may hear a
This light comes on when the ignition noise. This is normal and indicates that the When a cruising speed of the cruise con-
switch is turned to the “ON” position or the power steering system works properly. trol is set, this light will be on.
engine switch is pressed to change the Turn Signal Indicators
ignition mode to ON, and goes out when “CRUISE” Indicator Light
the engine is started. (if equipped)
If this light comes on or blinks while driv-
ing, the power steering system may not
work properly. Have the system inspected
by your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
shop. 50G055

NOTE: When you turn on the left or right turn sig-

While parking or driving at very low speed 52D113
nals, the corresponding green arrow on the
greater steering effort is required. This is instrument panel will flash along with the
When the cruise control system is on, this respective turn signal lights. When you
not a malfunction of the steering system light will be on.
but power steering control system limiting turn on the hazard warning switch, both
power assist in order to prevent it from arrows will flash along with all of the turn
over heating. signal lights.
• The steering wheel is operated very
often.
• The steering wheel is kept in a fully
turned position for a long while.
When the power steering control system
cools down, the power steering system is
restored back to the original condition.

2-66

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Main Beam (high beam) Indicator Glow Plug Indicator Light Master Warning Indicator Light
Light

60A543
78K049
50G056 If the coolant temperature is cool enough,
This indicator comes on when headlight this light comes on when the ignition switch When the information display shows warn-
main beams (high beams) are turned on. is turned to the “ON” position or the engine ing and indicator messages, this indicator
switch is pressed to change the ignition light may also blink.
Illumination Indicator Light mode to ON and goes out when the glow For details, refer to “Information Display” in
plug is heated enough for engine starting. this section.
Fuel Filter Warning Light

64J045

This indicator light comes on while the 60A541

position lights, tail light and/or the head- This light comes on for several seconds
lights are on. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to ON
so you can check that light is working.
If the light comes on when driving, there is
a possibility to have water in the fuel filter.
Drain water as soon as possible.Have your
vehicle inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop. For details of draining
water, refer to “Fuel Filter” in the “INSPEC-
TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

2-67

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Lighting Control Lever Lighting Operation With the headlights on, push the lever for-
ward to switch to the high beams (main
EXAMPLE beams) or pull the lever toward you to
(3) switch to the low beams. When the high
beams (main beams) are on, a light on the
instrument panel will come on. To momen-
tarily activate the high beams (main
beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever
(2) slightly toward you and release it when you
(1) have completed the signal.
60MK011
Automatic Lights Operation
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob (if equipped)
on the end of the lever. There are three
positions: EXAMPLE
65D611
OFF (1) (3) (4)
WARNING All lights are off.
To avoid possible injury, do not oper- (2)
ate controls by reaching through the Front position lights, tail lights, license
steering wheel. plate light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.
(3) (1) (2)
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light, instrument lights and headlights 64MS059
are on.

EXAMPLE

60MK012

2-68

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

ON: Lights ON
(5) LIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5).
DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).

Lighting Ignition mode

Main lights to be Ignition mode ON
switch posi- LOCK (OFF) or ACC
operated
tion LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK
Position lights,
– – – –
(1) OFF Tail lights
Headlights – – – –
Position lights,
– – – ON
(2) AUTO Tail lights
64MS060 Headlights – – – ON
Your vehicle’s lighting system is controlled Position lights,
by two main systems: the Lighting switch ON ON ON ON
(3) Tail lights
and the Auto-On Headlight System (when
the lighting switch is in the “AUTO” posi- Headlights – – – –
tion). Position lights,
The two systems work together to operate ON ON ON ON
(4) Tail lights
your lights as shown in the following chart:
Headlights ON ON ON ON

2-69

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob NOTE: With the headlights on, push the lever for-
on the end of the lever. There are four • Avoid covering the light sensor area of ward to switch to the high beams (main
positions: the windshield with a sticker. The sticker beams) or pull the lever toward you to
may impair the performance of the sen- switch to the low beams. When the high
OFF (1) sor and make the system unable to con- beams (main beams) are on, a light on the
All lights are off. trol operation of the lights correctly. instrument panel will come on. To momen-
AUTO (2) • If you changed the ignition mode to ON tarily activate the high beams (main
This function works when it on mode has by pressing the engine switch and the beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever
been changed to ON by pressing the “AUTO” position remains selected, the slightly toward you and release it when you
engine switch. The headlights and position headlights and position lights come on have completed the signal.
lights are turned on and off automatically automatically as the outside gets dark
even with the engine not running. Leav- Auto-on headlight system
according to the amount of outside light
detected by a sensor. They go out auto- ing the lights lit for a long time may lead
matically when you change the ignition to a completely discharged battery.
mode to “ACC” or “LOCK” (OFF) by press- (3)
ing the engine switch. Front position lights, tail lights, license
The light sensor (5) for sensing the amount plate light and instrument lights are on, but
of outside light is installed on the upper headlights are off.
part of the windshield. It also serves as the (4)
rain sensor for the rain-sensing wipers. Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light, instrument lights and headlights
CAUTION are on.
64MS062
If the light sensor area of the wind-
shield is covered with mud, ice, or EXAMPLE The Auto-on headlight system automati-
other similar substances, the head- cally turns on all lights that are operated by
lights and position lights may be the lighting control lever on the steering
turned on even when it is still light column, when the following three condi-
outside. Before removing such sub- tions are all met.
stances from the windshield, always Conditions for Auto-on headlight system
set the wiper control lever to the operation:
“OFF” position. If the lever is left in 1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).
the “AUTO” position, the wipers 2) The lighting control lever is in the
could unexpectedly operate and “AUTO” position.
cause injury, and could also be dam- 3) You press the engine switch to change
64MS061
aged. the ignition mode to ON.

2-70

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

This system is operated by a signal from Rain-triggered automatic lighting oper- Front Fog Light Switch
the light sensor (5) on the front windshield. ation (if equipped)
Do not cover the sensor (5). If you do, the The setting of the auto-on headlight sys-
system will not work correctly. tem can be changed to make it turn on the
headlights:
WARNING • when the rain sensor senses heavy rain-
It takes about 5 seconds for the light fall
sensor to react to a change in light- • when the rain sensor senses light and
ing conditions. To help avoid an acci- heavy rainfall (in coordination with rain-
dent due to reduced visibility, turn on sensing wiper operation), or
your headlights before driving into a • independently from rain-sensing wiper
tunnel, parking structure or the like. operation.
Light Reminder Buzzer
NOTE: The interior buzzer continuously beeps if 64J058
The light sensor is sensitive to infrared you open the driver’s door without turning The front fog light comes on when the fog
rays, so it may operate incorrectly in the off the headlights and position lights. This light switch is pushed in with the position
region of strong infrared rays. function is triggered under the following lights, tail lights and/or the headlights are
Reprogramming the automatic light condition: on. An indicator light above the switch will
function The headlights and/or position lights are be lit when the front fog light is on.
The following settings of the automatic on even after the ignition switch is turned
off, or the engine switch is pressed to NOTE:
light function can be customized to your
change the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF). In some countries the lighting operation
preference. Please contact an authorised
may be different from the above descrip-
Maruti Suzuki workshop if you want the The buzzer stops sounding when you turn
off the headlights and position lights. tion according to local regulations.
function reprogrammed.
Sensitivity of the light sensor NOTE:
The amount of outside light needed to turn A message is indicated on the information
the lights on and off is pre-set at the fac- display in the instrument cluster while the
tory. The sensitivity of the light sensor can buzzer is sounding.
be adjusted so that the lights are turned on
and off when it is:
• lighter outside than the pre-set condition,
or
• darker outside than the pre-set condition

2-71

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Headlight Leveling Switch Turn Signal Control Lever Turn Signal Operation
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position
or the ignition mode ON, move the lever up
or down to activate the right or left turn sig-
nals.
Normal turn signal
EXAMPLE

80JM040 65D611

Level the headlight beam according to the WARNING

load condition of your vehicle by turning
this switch. The chart below shows the To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
appropriate switch position for different ate controls by reaching through the
vehicle-load conditions. steering wheel.
Switch Position 60MK013
Vehicle Load Move the lever all the way upward or
Condition D13A D16AA downward to signal. When the turn is com-
Engine Engine
pleted, the signal will cancel and the lever
Driver only 0 0 will return to its normal position.
Driver + Lane change signal
1 passenger 0 0
(in front seat) EXAMPLE
Driver +
4 passengers, 1 1
no cargo
Driver +
4 passengers, 2 2
cargo added
60MK014
Driver + Move the lever part-way in the direction to
full cargo 3 3
turn and hold it there.

2-72

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

• The turn signal and its indicator flash Hazard Warning Switch Windshield Wiper and Washer
while the lever is held at the moved posi- Lever
tion. EXAMPLE
The turn signal and its indicator flash three
times even if you return the lever immedi-
ately after moving it.
NOTE:
The turn signal and its indicator can be set
whether they flash three times after the
turn signal lever is returned via the infor-
mation display. Refer to “Information Dis-
play” in this section.
NOTE: 61M0163
You can customize the setting for the num- Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-
ber of times of flashing of the turn signal vate the hazard warning lights. All turn sig- 57L21128
and its indicator (1 to 4 times). Please ask nal lights and both turn signal indicators
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for will flash simultaneously. To turn off the WARNING
the customization. lights, push the switch again.
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
Use the hazard warning lights to warn
ate controls by reaching through the
other traffic during emergency parking or
steering wheel.
when your vehicle could otherwise become
a traffic hazard.

2-73

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Wiper and Washer Operation Windshield Wipers with Rain Sens-

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
EXAMPLE ing Function (if equipped)
position or the ignition mode is ON, you
can use the wiper/washer lever or switch (if EXAMPLE
equipped). MIST
Windshield Wipers OFF
EXAMPLE AUTO
64MS064

If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME” LO

control, turn the control forward or rear-
ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera- HI
tion to the desired interval.
64MS065

Press the engine switch to change the igni-

tion mode to ON. To turn the rain-sensing
wipers on, move the lever down to one of
the three operating positions. In the
64MS063 “AUTO” position (if provided), the wipers
To turn the windshield wipers on, move the automatically operate when the wiper sys-
lever down to one of the three operating tem senses rain or snow. In the “LO” posi-
positions. In the “INT” position, the wipers tion, the wipers operate at a steady low
operate intermittently. The “INT” position is speed. In the “HI” position, the wipers
very convenient for driving in mist or light operate at a steady high speed. To turn off
rain. In the “LO” position, the wipers oper- the wipers, move the lever back to the
ate at a steady low speed. In the “HI” posi- “OFF” position.
tion, the wipers operate at a steady high
speed. To turn off the wipers, move the Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”
lever back to the “OFF” position. position; the wipers will operate continu-
ously at low speed for as long as you hold
Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST” the lever in the “MIST” position.
position, the windshield wipers will turn on
continuously at low speed.

2-74

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

– There were already raindrops on the

EXAMPLE CAUTION windshield before starting rain-sensing
wiper operation. You should remove
• Observe the following instructions the raindrops by operating the wipers
when the wiper lever is set to the under manual control.
“AUTO” position with the engine – The rain sensor is hotter than 80°C
switch in the ON mode. Otherwise, (176°F) in the sun or lower than –10°C
the wipers could unexpectedly (14°F) in freezing weather. (The wip-
operate and cause injury, and could ers do not operate under this condi-
also be damaged. tion.)
64MS066 – Do not touch or wipe the rain – The windshield is coated with a water-
If the control lever has on “AUTO” position, sensor area of the windshield repellent substance, which causes
you can change the system’s sensitivity to with a cloth. raindrops to run down quickly. This will
rain/snow by turning the knob of the con- – Do not hit the windshield or rain give a clearer view and the wipers
trol lever forward for increased sensitivity sensor. may seem to operate too frequently. In
or rearward for decreased sensitivity. • Be sure to set the wiper control this case, decrease the system’s sen-
lever to the “OFF” position before sitivity.
(1) washing the vehicle in an auto- – The sensor area is covered with a
matic car wash or cleaning the sticker.
windshield. – The wiper blades are damaged. You
should replace them.
NOTE:
• Under the following conditions, the rain • The following conditions may indicate
sensor may not be able to sense rain or problems with the rain-sensing wiper
snow correctly, and thus the rain-sensing system. If your system exhibits any of
wiper function may not work or may work the following conditions, have it
incorrectly. (Use a position other than inspected by an authorised Maruti
“AUTO” under these conditions.) Suzuki workshop.
– Rain or snow does not hit the rain sen- – Rainfall/snowfall rate varies but the
61M0219 sor area of the windshield, or the snow wiping interval remains constant.
(1) Rain sensor is not of a type that is able to be – Rain/snow is falling but the wipers do
detected by the sensor. not operate.
– The rain sensor area is covered with
mud, ice or other similar substance.
You should remove any foreign sub-
stance.

2-75

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Reprogramming the rain-sensing wiper Windshield Washer

function NOTICE
The “AUTO” position operation of the rain- EXAMPLE
sensing wiper function can be customized To help prevent damage to the wind-
to your preference by reprogramming its shield wiper and washer system
setting as follows. Please contact an components, you should take the fol-
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for this lowing precautions:
customization. • Do not continue to hold in the lever
when there is no windshield
Full-automatic wiping (factory setting) washer fluid being sprayed or the
The system automatically selects the most washer motor can be damaged.
appropriate of the following wiping modes: 64MS067 • Do not attempt to remove dirt from
no wiping, intermittent wiping, low-speed To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the a dry windshield with the wipers or
wiping, and high-speed wiping. you can damage the windshield
lever toward you. The windshield wipers and the wiper blades. Always wet
Semi-automatic wiping will automatically turn on at low speed if the windshield with washer fluid
The system automatically selects the most they are not already on and the “INT” posi- before operating the wipers.
appropriate of the following wiping modes: tion is equipped. • Clear ice or packed snow from the
intermittent wiping, low-speed wiping, or wiper blades before using the wip-
high-speed wiping. (The wipers do not stop WARNING ers.
automatically.) • To prevent windshield icing in cold • Check the washer fluid level regu-
weather, turn on the defroster to larly. Check it often when the
Intermittent wiping weather is bad.
The wipers operate only in the intermittent heat the windshield before and
during windshield washer use. • Only fill the washer fluid reservoir
wiping mode. The wiping interval can be 3/4 full during cold weather to allow
changed with the knob on the control lever. • Do not use radiator antifreeze in
the windshield washer reservoir. It room for expansion if the tempera-
can severely impair visibility when ture falls low enough to freeze the
sprayed on the windshield, and can solution.
also damage your vehicle’s paint.

2-76

64MS0-74E
BEFORE DRIVING

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch Tilt/Telescoping (if equipped) Steer-

(if equipped) NOTICE ing Lock Lever
Wiper Clear ice or snow from the rear win-
Washer EXAMPLE dow and rear wiper blade before EXAMPLE
using the rear wiper. Accumulated
ice or snow could prevent the wiper
blade from moving, causing damage
to the wiper motor.
(1)

Intermittent wiper
(2)
64MS068

To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear 61MM0A085

wiper switch on the end of the lever for- (1) LOCK
ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle is
equipped the “INT” position, the rear wiper (2) UNLOCK
operates intermittently when you twist the The lock lever is located under the steering
switch forward to the “INT” position. To turn column. To adjust the steering wheel
the rear wiper off, twist the switch rearward height and fore-aft position:
to the “OFF” position. 1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the
steering column.
With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position, 2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
twist the switch rearward and hold it there height and fore-aft position and lock the
to spray window washer fluid. steering column by pulling up the lock
lever.
With the rear wiper in the “ON” position, 3) Try moving the steering wheel up and
turn the switch forward and hold it there to down and back and forth to make sure
spray window washer fluid. it is securely locked in position.

WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while the vehicle is moving or
you could lose control of the vehicle.

2-77

64MS0-74E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Horn Heated Rear Window Switch When the rear window is misted, push this
(if equipped) switch (1) to clear the mist from the win-
dow.
EXAMPLE Type 1
An indicator light will be lit when the defog-
EXAMPLE ger is on. The defogger will work only
when the engine is running. To turn off the
defogger, push the switch (1) again.

NOTICE
The heated rear window uses a large
REAR
amount of electricity. Be sure to turn
off after the window and mirrors have
become clear.
68LM240 (1) NOTE:
• The defogger will work only when the
Press the horn button of the steering wheel 64MS167 engine is running.
to sound the horn. The horn will sound with • The defogger will automatically turn off
the ignition switch in any position or any Type 2
after the defogger remains on for 15 min-
ignition mode. EXAMPLE utes to prevent discharging of the bat-
tery.

2 3
1 4
0

A/C

(1)

64MS168

2-78

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 3-1
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 3-1
Engine Oil Consumption .................................................... 3-2
Ignition Switch
(Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) .................. 3-3
Engine Switch
(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) ........................ 3-5
Keyless Push Start System (if equipped) ......................... 3-6
Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 3-9
Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-10
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) .................. 3-11
Starting the Engine
(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) ........................ 3-12
Using the Transaxle ............................................................ 3-14
Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-16
Parking Sensors (if equipped) ........................................... 3-18
Rearview Camera (if equipped) .......................................... 3-24
Braking ................................................................................. 3-27

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas Warning Daily Inspection Checklist

WARNING
Before Driving
EXAMPLE (Continued)
• Avoid operating the vehicle with
the tailgate or trunk open. If it is
necessary to operate the vehicle
• with the tailgate or trunk open,
make sure the sunroof (if equipped)
and all windows are closed, and the
blower is at high speed with the air
intake selector set to the fresh air
position.
• To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the air inlet grille in front of the
52D334
windshield clear of snow, leaves or
other obstructions at all times.
WARNING • Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear
60A187
Avoid breathing exhaust gases
of snow and other material to help
Exhaust gases contain carbon monox- reduce the buildup of exhaust 1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights
ide, a potentially lethal gas that is col- gases under the vehicle. This is and reflectors are clean and unob-
orless and odorless. Since carbon particularly important when parked structed.
monoxide is difficult to detect by in blizzard conditions. 2) Visually check the tires for the following
itself, be sure to take the following • Have the exhaust system inspected points:
precautions to help prevent carbon periodically for damage and leaks. – the depth of the tread groove
monoxide from entering your vehicle. Any damage or leaks should be – abnormal wear, cracks and damage
• Do not leave the engine running in repaired immediately. – loose wheel nuts
garages or other confined areas. – existence of foreign material such as
• Do not park with the engine running nails, stones, etc.
for a long period of time, even in an Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND
open area. If it is necessary to sit for MAINTENANCE” section for details.
a short time in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, make sure the 3) Look for fluid and oil leaks.
air intake selector is set to the fresh NOTE:
air position and the blower is at high It is normal for water to drip from the air
speed. conditioning system after use.
(Continued)

3-1

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and item “All latches, hinges and locks” of Engine Oil Consumption
latched. “CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Peri-
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights, odic Maintenance Schedule” in the It is normal for the engine to consume
brake lights and horn for proper opera- “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” some engine oil during normal vehicle
tion. section for lubrication schedule. operation.
6) Adjust the seat and head restraint.
The amount of engine oil consumed
7) Check the brake pedal and the parking WARNING depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
brake lever.
8) Adjust the mirrors. Make sure the hood is fully closed quality of the oil and the conditions under
9) Make sure that you and all passengers and latched before driving. If it is not, which the vehicle is driven.
have properly fastened the seat belts. it can fly up unexpectedly during More oil is consumed during high-speed
10)Make sure that all warning lights come driving, obstructing your view and driving and when there is frequent acceler-
on as the ignition switch is turned to the resulting in an accident. ation and deceleration. Under high loads,
“ON” position or the engine switch is your engine also will consume more oil.
Once a month, or each time you fill your A new engine also consumes more oil,
pressed to change the ignition mode to fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a
ON. since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder
tire pressure gauge. Also check the tire walls have not yet become conditioned.
11)Check all gauges. pressure of the spare tire.
12)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM New engines reach the normal level of oil
WARNING light turns off when the park- consumption only after approximately
ing brake is released. 5000 km (3000 miles) driving.

Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel Oil consumption:
tank, perform the following under-hood Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km
checks: (1 Qt. per 600 miles)

1) Engine oil level When judging the amount of oil consump-

2) Coolant level tion, note that the oil may become diluted
3) Brake fluid level and make it difficult to accurately judge the
4) Battery electrolyte level true oil level.
5) Windshield washer fluid level As an example, if a vehicle is used for
6) Hood latch operation repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
Pull the hood release handle inside the mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
vehicle. Make sure that you cannot show any drop in the oil level at all, even
open the hood all the way without after 1000 km (600 miles) or more of driv-
releasing the secondary latch. Be sure ing. This is because the oil is gradually
to close the hood securely after check- becoming diluted with fuel or moisture,
ing for proper latch operation. See the

3-2

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

making it appear that the oil level has not Ignition Switch
changed.
You should also be aware that the diluting (Vehicle without Keyless
ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle Push Start System)
is subsequently driven at high speeds,
such as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after high-speed driving.

EXAMPLE
52KM052

The ignition switch has the following four

positions:
LOCK
This is the normal parking position. It is the
65D611 only position in which the key can be
removed.
WARNING EXAMPLE
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the Push
steering wheel.
Turn to “LOCK”

60G033A

3-3

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

You must push in the key to turn it to the

“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and NOTICE
prevents normal use of the steering wheel
after the key is removed. • Do not use the starter motor for
more than 30 seconds at a time. If
To release the steering lock, insert the key the engine does not start, wait 15
and turn it clockwise to one of the other seconds before trying again. If the
positions. If you have trouble turning the engine does not start after several
key to unlock the steering, try turning the attempts, check the fuel and ignition
steering wheel slightly to the right or left systems or consult your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
while turning the key. • Do not leave the ignition switch in
ACC the “ON” position if the engine is
Accessories such as the radio can oper- not running as the battery will dis-
ate, but the engine is off. charge.
81A297S
ON
This is the normal operating position. All
electrical systems are on. WARNING
• Never return the ignition switch to
START the “LOCK” position and remove the
This is the position for starting the engine ignition key while the vehicle is
using the starter motor. The key should be moving. The steering wheel will lock
released from this position as soon as the and you will not be able to steer the
engine starts. vehicle.
• Always return the ignition switch to
Ignition key reminder (if equipped) the “LOCK” position and remove the
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind ignition key when leaving the vehi-
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the cle even if only for a short time. Also
ignition switch when the driver’s door is do not leave children alone in a
opened. parked vehicle. Unattended children
could cause accidental movement of
the vehicle or could tamper with
power windows or power sunroof (if
equipped). They also could suffer
from heat stroke in warm or hot
weather. These could result in
severe injury or even death.

3-4

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Switch LOCK (OFF) depressing the brake and clutch pedal and
Once this mode is selected by pressing the pressing the engine switch to select the
(Vehicle with Keyless Push engine switch, opening or closing of any ignition mode.
Start System) door (including the tailgate) will result in
NOTE:
automatic locking or steering.
You do not need to keep the engine switch
ACC pressed to start the engine.
Press the engine switch to select this igni-
tion mode to use such electric equipment NOTICE
as the audio system, outside rearview mir-
rors and accessory socket with the engine Do not leave the engine switch in the
off. When this position is selected, the “ACC” or “ON” mode when the
information display in the instrument clus- engine is not running. Avoid using
ter shows the following message: “ACC” the radio or other electric accesso-
IGNITION SWITCH POSITION. Refer to ries for a long time when the engine
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” mode
EXAMPLE DRIVING” section for details. when the engine is not running, oth-
61MM0B001 ON erwise the battery may discharge.
• With the engine off
You can use such electric equipment as
the power windows and wipers with the
engine off. When this ignition mode is
selected by pressing the engine switch,
the information display in the instrument
cluster shows the following message:
“ON” IGNITION SWITCH POSITION.
• With the engine on
All electric equipment is operational. The
vehicle can be driven when you have
selected this ignition mode by pressing
the engine switch.
START
If you have the keyless push start system
controller with you, you can start the
engine after shifting to “N” (neutral),

3-5

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Keyless Push Start System illumination will go out when the head-
In the presence of strong radio signals or lights are turned off.
noise, you may not be able to change the (if equipped)
ignition mode to ACC or ON or to start the Provided the keyless push start system
engine using the engine switch. In this remote controller is within the “interior
case, the information display on the instru- workable area” (refer to the related expla-
ment cluster will show the following mes- nation in this section), you can use the
sage: KEY FOB NOT DETECTED. engine switch for starting the engine and
selecting an ignition mode (ACC or ON). In
Unreleased Steering Lock Warning addition, the following functions can be
If the steering lock remains engaged when used:
you press the engine switch to change the • Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless
ignition mode to “ON”, the information dis- Push Start System Remote Controller” in
play in the instrument cluster shows the the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for 82K253
message: “TRN. STEERING WHEEL TO details. NOTE:
RELEASE LOCK”. Refer to “Information • Locking and unlocking doors (including To save the battery, the illumination will be
Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sec- the tailgate) using a request switch. automatically turned off when both of the
tion for details. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System following conditions are simultaneously
NOTE: Remote Controller” in the “BEFORE met:
The steering lock may not be released if DRIVING” section for details. • The headlights and position lights are
some load is acting on the steering wheel. • Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to turned off.
If this happens, turn the steering wheel to “Immobilizer System” in the “BEFORE • A period of 15 minutes has elapsed after
the right or left to relieve it from the load DRIVING” section for details. opening the driver’s door.
before you press the engine switch again Engine Switch Illumination Selection of Ignition Modes
to change to the desired ignition mode. Press the engine switch to select the
The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the “ACC” or “ON” mode as follows when you
following situations: use an electric accessory or check the
• When the engine is off and the driver’s operation of instruments without running
door is open or for 15 seconds after the the engine.
drivers door is closed.
• When the engine is off and the position 1) Bring the keyless push start system
lights are on. The illumination will go out remote controller with you and sit in the
when the position lights are turned off. driver’s seat.
• When the engine is on and the position
lights and/or the headlights are on. The

3-6

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

2) Without depressing the clutch pedal, If the MASTER WARNING indicator light switch with the lock button end of the
press the engine switch (1). blinks and the ignition modes cannot remote controller (2) for about 2 sec-
be selected onds.
Your keyless push start system remote con-
NOTE:
troller may not be sensed as being within the
• If you still cannot select the ignition
“interior workable area” (refer to the related
modes, there may be some problem with
explanation in this section). Try again after
the keyless push start system. Contact
making sure you have the remote controller
an authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
with you. If the ignition modes still cannot be
for an inspection of the system.
selected, the battery of the remote controller
(1) • The immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
may be discharged. To be able to select an
tem warning light will come on for about
ignition mode, you must then use the follow-
5 seconds while the master warning indi-
ing method:
cator light is blinking. In addition, the
82K254 information display in the instrument
EXAMPLE cluster will show a message during this
Every time you press the engine switch,
the ignition mode changes as follows. (1)
time. Refer to “Information Display” in
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
details.
• You may customize the system to cause
the interior buzzer to sound once for the
remote controller out of sensing range
(2)
warning. To incorporate this customiza-
LOCK ACC ON tion, please contact an authorised Maruti
(OFF) (Audio equipment)
Suzuki workshop.
• If the battery of the remote controller is
58MST0302 about to become completely discharged,
the corresponding message will appear
57L31033 1) Without depressing the brake pedal on the information display when you
NOTE: and the clutch pedal, push the engine press the engine switch to change the
When selecting the ignition modes, the switch (1). ignition mode to ON. Refer to “Informa-
information display in the instrument clus- 2) Within about 10 seconds during which tion Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”
ter shows certain messages. Refer to the master warning indicator light in the section for details. For details on replac-
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE instrument cluster is blinking and the ing the battery, refer to the “Keyless
DRIVING” section for details. “PLACE KEY FOB ON START Push Start System Remote Controller” in
SWITCH” message appears on the the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
information display, touch the engine

3-7

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Remote Controller Outside Warning (1) Immobilizer/keyless push start sys- Interior Workable Area for Engine
When either of the conditions described tem warning light (blinks) Starting, Ignition Mode Selection
below is met, the system issues the remote (2) Master warning indicator light (blinks) and Remote Controller Outside
controller outside warning by sounding the NOTE: Warning
interior and exterior buzzers. At the same • If the warning is given, locate the remote
time, the immobilizer/keyless push start controller as soon as possible.
system warning light comes on and the • Any attempt to start the engine will fail
master warning indicator light blinks. while the warning is active. The mes-
• Any door is opened and then closed sage appearing on the information dis-
while the remote controller is not inside play in the instrument cluster will also
the vehicle and the engine is running or indicate this condition. Refer to “Informa-
the ignition mode has been changed to tion display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”
“ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine section for details.
switch. • Normally, the immobilizer/keyless push
• The remote controller is not inside the start system warning light should go out (1)
vehicle when you attempt to start the and the master warning indicator light 61MM0B002
engine after changing the ignition mode should stop blinking shortly after the
to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine remote controller is brought back inside (1) Interior workable area
switch. the vehicle. If they remain lit and blink- The interior workable area for these func-
ing, change the ignition mode to “LOCK” tions is defined as all the interior spaces
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch and except for the space above the instrument
(2) then perform the engine starting opera- panel.
tion. Refer to “Starting the Engine” in this
section. NOTE:
• Always keep the remote controller with • Even when the remote controller is in the
you as the driver. “interior workable area”, if it is in any of
the following conditions, you may not be
able to start the engine or select the igni-
tion modes, and the remote controller
outside warning may be given.
– The remote controller’s battery is low.
– The remote controller is affected by
(1) strong radio signals or noise.
61MM0A182
– The remote controller is in contact with
or covered by a metallic object.

3-8

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

– The remote controller is in stowage Parking Brake Lever

like the glove box or a door pocket. WARNING
– The remote controller is in the sun
visor pocket or on the floor.
EXAMPLE • Never drive your vehicle with the
parking brake on: rear brake effec-
• Even when the remote controller is out- tiveness can be reduced from over-
side the “interior workable” area, if it is in (1)
heating, brake life may be shortened,
any of the following conditions, you may or permanent brake damage may
be able to start the engine or select the result.
(2)
ignition mode. The “remote controller • If the parking brake does not hold the
outside” warning may not be given at vehicle securely or does not fully
that time. release, have your vehicle inspected
– The remote controller is outside the immediately by an authorised Maruti
vehicle but very close to a door. (3) Suzuki workshop.
– The remote controller is on the instru-
ment panel. WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
64MS185 before leaving your vehicle or it may
move, causing injury or damage. When
(1) To set parking, make sure the gearshift lever
(2) To release is in reverse or first gear. Remember,
(3) To release even though the transaxle is in gear,
you must set the parking brake fully.
The parking brake lever is located between
the seats. To set the parking brake, hold WARNING
the brake pedal down and pull the parking
brake lever all the way up. To release the When parking the vehicle in extremely
parking brake, hold the brake pedal down, cold weather, the following procedure
pull up slightly on the parking brake lever, should be used:
push the button on the end of the lever 1) Set the parking brake.
2) Turn off the engine, then shift into
with your thumb, and lower the lever to its reverse or first gear.
original position. 3) Get out of the vehicle and put
chocks under the wheels. Release
the parking brake.
When you return to your vehicle, you
must remember to first set the parking
brake, then remove the wheel chocks.

3-9

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer Pedal mal condition caused by environmental

factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
you to release the parking brake if you start EXAMPLE
the vehicle without releasing the parking WARNING
brake. Make sure that the parking brake is (1) (2) If brake squeal is excessive and
fully released and the brake system warning occurs each time the brakes are
light turns off. applied, you should have the brakes
checked by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
(3)
WARNING
80J2121
Do not ride the brakes by applying
them continuously or resting your
Clutch Pedal (1) foot on the pedal. This will result in
overheating of the brakes which
The clutch pedal is used to disengage the could cause unpredictable braking
drive to the wheels when starting the action, longer stopping distances, or
engine, stopping, or shifting the gearshift permanent brake damage.
lever. Depressing the pedal disengages the
clutch. Accelerator Pedal (3)
WARNING This pedal controls the speed of the
engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting on increases power output and speed.
the clutch pedal. It could result in
excessive clutch wear, clutch damage,
or unexpected loss of engine braking.
Brake Pedal (2)
Your vehicle is equipped with either front
and rear disc brakes or front disc brakes
and rear drum brakes. Depressing the
brake pedal applies both sets of brakes.
You may hear occasional brake squeal
when you apply the brakes. This is a nor-

3-10

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Starting the Engine Starting a Cold and Warm Engine Restarting diesel engine after fuel-
empty stop
(Vehicle without Keyless Push Cold engine If the engine stops and the low fuel warning
Start System) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- light and the malfunction indicator light
tion and wait until the glow plug indicator come on, use the following procedure:
Before Starting the Engine goes out if it comes on. Crank the engine 1) Fill the fuel tank.
by turning the ignition key to “START”. 2) Hold the ignition key in “ON” position for
Release the key when the engine starts. 5-10 seconds to feed fuel.
3) Perform above engine starting proce-
NOTICE dure to start the engine.
If the malfunction indicator light still comes
• Stop turning the starter immedi- on after the engine started, there may be
ately after the engine has started or some problem with the engine. Ask your
the starter system can be damaged. authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to have
• Do not crank the engine for more the engine inspected.
than 30 seconds at a time. If the
engine doesn’t start on the first try,
wait about 15 seconds before try-
64MS146
ing again.
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully. Warm engine
2) Shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the Crank the engine by turning the ignition
clutch pedal all the way to the floor. Hold key to “START”. Release the key when the
the clutch pedal while starting the engine starts.
engine.
Caution when stopping the engine with
WARNING turbocharger
When stopping the engine after climbing or
• Make sure that the parking brake is high speed driving, let the engine idle for
set fully and the transaxle is in about one minute or more (if it is not pro-
Neutral before attempting to start hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and
the engine. engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
• Engine can be started only after from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated
depressing the clutch pedal. How- engine oil will damage the bearings of the
ever, before depressing the clutch turbocharger.
pedal make sure that the transaxle
is in Neutral and brake pedal is
depressed.

3-11

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Starting the Engine 3) The “PUSH START SWITCH” message in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
will appear on the information display in details.
(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start the instrument cluster. Push the engine • You should turn off such loads as the
System) switch (1). When the engine is started, headlights and air conditioning system to
the starter motor will automatically stop. facilitate starting of the engine.
Before Starting the Engine • Even if you fail to start the engine, the
WARNING starter motor will stop operating auto-
matically after a short time. After the
Make sure that the parking brake is starter motor has stopped or if there is
set fully and the transaxle is in Neu- some problem with the system, the
tral before attempting to start the starter motor will rotate only while the
engine. engine switch is being pressed.
Stopping the engine
NOTICE • Depress the engine switch to stop the
• Do not depress the accelerator engine after the vehicle stopped com-
during the engine starting proce- pletely.
dure. • In case of emergency, you can stop the
• If the engine does not respond engine by quickly pushing the engine
when you try to start it with the switch more than 3 times, or pushing
engine switch or if the engine and holding the engine switch more than
64MS169
switch continuous to cycle through 2 seconds while the vehicle in motion.
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully. the “LOCK” (OFF) - “ACC” - “ON”
2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress mode, the vehicle battery may be NOTE:
the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch and discharged. Check the voltage of Except in emergency, do not stop the
brake pedals fully depressed. the vehicle battery before trying engine while the vehicle in motion.
again. The steering and braking operation will
require more efforts when the engine
NOTE: stopped.
• You do not need to keep the engine Refer to “Braking” in this section.
switch pressed to start the engine.
• The engine of a manual transaxle vehi- • If the engine has been stopped and
cle will not start unless the clutch pedal stayed as it as for while after the engine
is depressed. was stopped unexpectedly or was raced
• During the engine starting procedure, before stopped, a clicking sound may be
(1) messages on the information display will heard from around the engine when
help you. Refer to “Information Display” engine restarted. This is not a malfunc-
82K254

3-12

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

tion. In this case, always let the engine Caution when stopping the engine with then use the following method to be able to
idle before stop it. turbocharger start the engine.
When stopping the engine after climbing or
Starting a Cold and Warm Engine high speed driving, let the engine idle for EXAMPLE
Cold engine about one minute or more (if it is not pro-
Depress the clutch and brake pedals fully hibited) to cool down the turbocharger and (1)
and press the engine switch to crank the engine oil. This is to prevent the engine oil
engine. If the glow plug indicator light from over-deteriorating. Deteriorated
comes on, the engine will start automati- engine oil will damage the bearings of the
cally after the glow plug indicator light goes turbocharger.
off or 10 seconds past. Restarting diesel engine after fuel-
empty stop
NOTICE If the engine stops and the low fuel warn-
(2)

Do not crank the engine for more ing light and the malfunction indicator light
than 30 seconds at a time. come on, use the following procedure:
If the engine doesn’t start on the first 1) Fill the fuel tank.
try, wait about 15 seconds before try- 2) Press the engine switch to change the
ing again. ignition mode to “ON” for 5-10 seconds 58MST0302
to feed fuel. 1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
Warm engine 3) Perform above engine starting proce- 2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress
Crank the engine by pressing the engine dure to start the engine. the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch and
switch to change the ignition mode to If the malfunction indicator light still comes brake pedals fully depressed.
“START”. on after the engine started, there may be 3) The “PUSH START SWITCH.” mes-
some problem with the engine. Ask your sage will appear on the information dis-
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop to play in the instrument cluster. Press the
have the engine inspected. engine switch (1).
If the MASTER WARNING indicator light 4) Within about 10 seconds of blinking of
blinks and the engine cannot be started the “MASTER WARNING” indicator
Your keyless push start system remote light in the instrument cluster, touch the
controller may not be sensed as being engine switch with the lock button end
within the interior workable area. Try again of the remote controller (2) for about 2
after making sure that you have the remote seconds.
controller with you. If the engine still can- NOTE:
not be started, the battery of the remote • If you still cannot start the engine after
controller may be discharged. You must several attempts using the above

3-13

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

method, there may be a problem else- Returning the ignition mode to Using the Transaxle
where, such as a low battery. Contact “LOCK” (OFF)
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop Manual Transaxle
for inspection. “LOCK” (OFF) mode reminder buzzer
• The immobilizer/keyless push start sys- If the driver’s door is opened without 5MT model
tem warning light will come on for about returning the ignition mode to “LOCK”
5 seconds while the master warning indi- (OFF) by pressing the engine switch, a
cator light is blinking. In addition, the buzzer sounds to warn you of this state.
information display will show a certain • If you open the driver’s door after press-
message during this time. Refer to ing the engine switch to change the igni-
“Information Display” in the “BEFORE tion mode to ACC, the interior buzzer
DRIVING” section for details. beeps intermittently.
• You may customize the system to cause • The buzzer will stop sounding if you then
the interior buzzer to sound once for the push the engine switch twice, thus bring-
remote controller out of sensing range ing it back the ignition mode to “LOCK”
warning. Please contact an authorised (OFF).
Maruti Suzuki workshop for the customi- EXAMPLE
zation. NOTE:
• If the battery of the remote controller is Whenever you leave the vehicle, make 79MH0303

about to be completely discharged, a sure you have returned the ignition mode 6MT model
message warning this will appear on the to “LOCK” (OFF) using the engine switch
information display when the ignition and then lock the doors. Without returning
mode is changed to “ON” by pressing the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), you
the engine switch. For details on replac- cannot use a request switch or keyless
ing the battery, refer to the “Keyless push start system remote controller to lock
Push Start System Remote Controller” in the doors.
the “BEFORE DRIVING” section. Steering lock warning buzzer
If the steering lock fails to engage due to a
fault in the system when the ignition mode
is turned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the EXAMPLE
engine switch and then any door (including
the tailgate) is opened or closed, the inte- 61MS2A004
rior buzzer will warn you of this condition Starting off
with repeated short beeps. If this happens, To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the
have the vehicle inspected by an autho- way to the floor and shift into 1st gear.
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop. After releasing the parking brake, gradually

3-14

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

release the clutch. When you hear a Downshifting maximum allowable speeds
change in the engine’s sound, slowly press
5MT model WARNING
the accelerator while continuing to gradu-
ally release the clutch. Downshifting km/h (mph) • Reduce your speed and downshift
to a lower gear before going down
Shifting 2nd to 1st 35 (22) a long or steep hill. A lower gear
All forward gears are synchronized, which will allow the engine to provide
provides for quiet, and easy shifting. 3rd to 2nd 65 (40) braking. Avoid riding the brakes or
Always depress the clutch pedal all the 4th to 3rd 100 (62) they may overheat, resulting in
way to the floor before shifting gears. brake failure.
Ensure that the engine rpm does not rise 5th to 4th 145 (90)* • When driving on slippery roads, be
to the red zone of the tachometer. sure to slow down before down-
6MT model shifting. Excessive and/or sudden
Downshifting km/h (mph) changes in engine speed may
cause loss of traction, which could
2nd to 1st 40 (25) cause you to lose control.
3rd to 2nd 70 (43)
4th to 3rd 115 (71) NOTICE
5th to 4th 160 (99)* Make sure that the vehicle is com-
pletely stationary before you shift
6th to 5th 200 (124)* into reverse.
*NOTE:
EXAMPLE
You may not accelerate to the maximum NOTICE
allowable speed because of the driving sit-
61MS2A005 uation and/or the vehicle condition. • To help avoid clutch damage, do
not use the clutch pedal as a foot-
Reverse gear (6MT model): while lifting up rest while driving or use the clutch
the ring, shift the gearshift lever to the NOTICE to keep the vehicle stationary on a
rightmost position and engage the gear. When downshifting to a lower gear, slope. Depress the clutch fully
make sure not to downshift at the when shifting.
speed faster than the maximum • When shifting or starting off, do not
allowable speeds for the next lower race the engine. Racing the engine
speed, or severe engine damage can can shorten engine life and cause
result. negative effect to smooth shifting.

3-15

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Cruise Control (if equipped) To Set Cruising Speed

The cruise control system allows you to 1) Turn on the cruise control system by
maintain a steady speed without keeping (2) pushing the “CRUISE” switch (1). When
(1)
your foot on the accelerator pedal. The the “CRUISE” indicator light comes on,
controls for operating the cruise control you can set cruising speed.
system are on the steering wheel. (3) 2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
You can use the cruise control system with 3) Push the “SET –” switch (4) and the
the following conditions: (4)
“SET” indicator light will turn on. Take
• The gear position is in 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
(if equipped). your foot off the accelerator pedal and
• The vehicle speed is about 40 km/h (25 61MS416 the set speed will be maintained.
mph) or higher. (1) “CRUISE” switch WARNING
(2) “CANCEL” switch
WARNING (3) “RES +” switch If the cruising speed is set by acci-
To help avoid loss of vehicle control, (4) “SET –” switch dent, you cannot decelerate and may
do not use the cruise control system loose control of the vehicle. This
when driving in heavy traffic, on slip- could lead to an accident, resulting in
pery or winding roads, or on steep severe injury or death.
downgrades. Turn off the cruise control system
and make sure the “CRUISE” indica-
tor light is off when the system is not
in use.

3-16

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

“CRUISE” Indicator Light To decelerate, depress the brake pedal. To Change Cruising Speed
The set speed will be canceled and “SET”
indicator light will go off. Using the accelerator pedal
To resume the previously set speed, push To reset at a faster cruising speed, accel-
the “RES +” switch (3) and turn on the erate to the desired speed using the accel-
“SET” indicator light again when vehicle erator pedal and push the “SET –” switch
speed is above 40 km/h (25 mph). The (4). The new speed will be maintained.
vehicle will accelerate to and maintain the Using the brake pedal
52D113
previously set speed. To reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-
When you push the “CRUISE” switch, the erate to the desired speed using the brake
system is on and a “CRUISE” indicator pedal and push the “SET –” switch (4). The
light on the instrument cluster will be on. new speed will be maintained.
“SET” Indicator Light
NOTE:
When the brake pedal is depressed, the
“SET” indicator light goes off until the cruis-
ing speed is reset.
Using the “RES +” switch or the “SET –”
switch
65D474 To reset at a faster cruising speed, press
repeatedly or hold push the “RES +” switch
When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by (3). Vehicle speed will steadily increase.
the cruise control system, a “SET” indica- When you release the switch, the new
tor light on the instrument cluster will be speed will be maintained.
on.
To Change Speed Temporarily To reset at a slower cruising speed, press
When the cruising speed is maintained, repeatedly or hold push the “SET –” switch
you can temporarily accelerate or deceler- (4) until the vehicle has slowed to the
ate. desired speed, then release the switch.
The new speed will be maintained.
To accelerate, depress the accelerator
pedal. When you take your foot off the NOTE:
pedal, your vehicle will return to the set You can adjust the set speed by approxi-
speed. mately 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) by pushing the
“RES +” switch (3) or the “SET –” switch
(4) quickly.

3-17

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Cancellation of the Cruise Control Parking Sensors (if equipped) gearshift lever is in “R” position and the
The “SET” indicator light will go off and the parking sensor switch is in the “ON”
cruise control will be canceled temporarily position. This function is helpful in the
with following procedures: following cases: pulling over to the curb;
parallel-parking the vehicle; steering the
• Push the “CANCEL” switch (2). vehicle into a garage; driving along an
• Depress the brake pedal. alley; and moving slowly in a place with
• Depress the clutch pedal. obstacles.
• The vehicle speed falls more than about
20 percent from the set speed. (1)
WARNING
• Any time the vehicle speed falls below
40 km/h (25 mph). • The parking sensor warns you of
To resume the previously set speed, push
61MM0A192 obstacles with buzzers and by
(1) Symbol representing an obstacle showing you the location of the
the “RES +” switch (3) and turn on the obstacles on the information dis-
“SET” indicator light. Besides, the vehicle detected by parking sensor*
play. However, you must still pay
speed has to be above 40 km/h (25 mph) * This symbol represents an obstacle full attention yourself while driving.
when the vehicle is not in the above condi- that is located to the right rear at • The sensors can detect obstacles
tions. the vehicle. only within a limited area and only
To turn off the cruise control system, push when the vehicle is moving within a
• The parking sensor system uses ultra- limited speed range. So, in tricky
the “CRUISE” switch (1) and make sure sonic sensors to detect obstacles near
the “CRUISE” indicator light is off. areas, you must move the vehicle
the rear bumper. If obstacles are sensed slowly while checking around it
Also, if the malfunction indicator light in the while you are parking or moving the using your direct vision or rearview
instrument cluster comes on or blinks, the vehicle slowly, the system warns you by mirrors. There is increased risk of
cruise control system will be turned off. sounding a buzzer and displaying sym- an accident if you control the vehi-
bols representing the obstacles on the cle relying only on the parking sen-
NOTE: information display in the instrument
If you turn off the cruise control system, the sor.
cluster.
previously set speed in the memory is • The system emits an ultrasonic wave
cleared. Reset your cruising speed again. and the relevant sensor detects the NOTICE
return of the wave reflected by an obsta-
cle. The system measures the time Parking sensors are only for driver’s
taken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the assistance
obstacle and return from it, from which it
determines the obstacle’s position.
• The parking sensor function can be used
when you press the engine switch to
change the ignition mode to “ON”, the

3-18

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Sensor Locations Working sensors

On the rear bumper The sensors that work depends on the WARNING
position of the gearshift lever as follows:
• Under the following conditions, the
Gearshift lever N, parking sensor system may not
R work normally because the sensors
position 1st – 5th or 6th cannot detect obstacles correctly.
Rear Center On Off – Sensors are covered with mud,
sensors ice or other materials. (Such mate-
Corner On Off rials must be removed for normal
operation.)
Approximate areas where obstacles can – Sensors are wet from water
be detected splashes or heavy rain.
– Sensors are covered by a hand,
EXAMPLE sticker, accessory, etc.
– There is an accessory or other
object attached within the sen-
sor’s sensing area.
(2) (1) (1) (2) – Items such as tow hooks, com-
64MS170 mercially available corner poles,
(1) Rear center sensors (2 places) radio antenna, etc. are installed
(2) Rear corner sensors (2 places) on the bumper.
– The height of the bumper is
changed due to alteration to the
NOTICE suspension or other causes.
• Avoid hitting the sensor areas or – The sensor areas are extremely
directing the nozzle of a high-pres- hot from direct sunlight or cold
64MS007
sure car washer onto the sensor due to freezing weather.
• Any obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in) – The vehicle is on a rough surface,
areas. Otherwise, the sensors may slope, gravel road or grass field.
be damaged. from the sensor or just below the sensor
is not detectable. – The vehicle is at a steep angle.
• If the bumper hits a hard object, the – Sensors have intercepted ultra-
sensors on it may not work prop- • The sensors can detect an obstacle up
to about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the rear of sonic noise from another vehi-
erly. If this occurs, have the sen- cle’s horn, engine air braking
sors inspected by an authorised vehicle. system (large vehicles), or park-
Maruti Suzuki workshop. ing sensor.
(Continued)

3-19

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING
(Continued)
– Obstacles are too close to the
sensors.
– Sensors are at an angle to a
highly reflective object such as
glass. (Ultrasonic waves are not
reflected back from the obstacle.)
• Sensors may not be able to cor-
rectly detect the following types of
obstacles:
– Objects made of a thin material
like wire netting and ropes
– Square-shaped curbstones or
other objects with sharp edges
– Tall objects with a large upper part
like a road sign
– Low-profile objects such as curb-
stones
– Sound-absorbing objects such as
cotton and snow

NOTE:
• Thin poles or obstacles lower than the
sensors may become undetectable as
the vehicle moves closer to them even if
they have been detected from longer
distances.
• The distance calculated by the system to
a road sign or similar obstacle may be
shorter than the actual distance.

3-20

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

How to Use the Parking Sensor • When the ignition mode is “ON” and the indicator light in the parking sensor switch is on,
indicating that the parking sensor is ready for operation under the following conditions:
Parking sensor switch – The gearshift lever is in the “R” position.
– The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 9 km/h (6 mph) when
decelerating the vehicle such as for parking.
(2) – The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 13 km/h (9 mph) when
accelerating.
• To deactivate the parking sensor, push the parking sensor switch and make sure the
(1) indicator light goes off.

Switch position State

EXAMPLE
ON
• When the indicator light is on and all necessary conditions are
met, system becomes ready for operation.
61MS403

(1) Parking sensor switch

(2) Indicator EXAMPLE
OFF
• The system does not operate. Push the switch to turn off the
indicator if you do not wish to use the parking sensor.

NOTE:
If you push the parking sensor switch from the OFF to ON position when the ignition mode
has been changed to ON by pressing the engine switch, the inside buzzer sounds.

3-21

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Obstacle Indication by Parking Sen- Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound and a
sor symbol representing the obstacle appears on the information display in the instrument
cluster.
EXAMPLE • A different symbol is displayed depending on the direction and distance of the obstacle.
• A buzzer located behind the rear seat sounds when a sensor at the rear detects an
obstacle.
• Warnings when obstacles are detected by corner sensors

Distance (approx.) Buzzer Symbol

45 – 60 cm Short beeps at short intervals Three lines
(18 – 24 in)
(2) (1) (2) 35 – 45 cm Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines
(14 – 18 in)
64MS008 Less than 35 cm
Continuous beep One line
(1) Obstacle detected by rear center sen- (14 in)
sors
(2) Obstacle detected by rear corner sen- • Warnings when obstacles are detected by center sensors
sors
Distance (approx.) Buzzer Symbol
60 – 150 cm Short beeps at long intervals
(24 – 59 in)
Three lines
45 – 60 cm Short beeps at short intervals
(18 – 24 in)
35 – 45 cm Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines
(14 – 18 in)
Less than 35 cm
Continuous beep One line
(14 in)
NOTE:
• Symbols are displayed with a short delay after the detection of obstacles.
• If the system detects multiple obstacles simultaneously, the display shows all of their
positions using the corresponding symbols. However, the buzzers will sound only for
the nearest obstacles.

3-22

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Set Sensors Warning and Indicator Messages

You can select either the normal or trailer If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a message is dis-
mode of the parking sensor via the infor- played on the information display in the instrument cluster, and a symbol blinks and the
mation display. Refer to “Information Dis- buzzer sounds. If a message is displayed, follow its instruction.
play” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.
Message Symbol Buzzer Probable cause and remedy
Normal mode
All sensors operate. Use this mode under Two blinking Series of There may be problem with the
normal conditions. lines in a sen- double parking sensor system.
Trailer mode sor location. beeps Have your vehicle inspected by
The rear corner and rear center sensors an authorised Maruti Suzuki
are inhibited from operating. Use this workshop.
mode when towing a trailer.

NOTICE
Make sure the normal mode is One blinking Series of The indicated sensor is contami-
selected with the parking sensor line in a sensor single nated.
when steering the vehicle into a location. beeps Wipe it clean with a soft cloth.
garage. If the parking sensor is left in
the trailer mode, the rear corner and
rear center sensors are not function-
ing.

3-23

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Rearview Camera Rearview Camera Location

NOTICE
(if equipped)
When the gearshift lever is shifted to the If you use the rearview camera for a
“R” position while the ignition switch is in long time when the ignition switch is
the “ON” position or the ignition mode is in the “ON” position or the ignition
ON, the rearview camera system automati- mode is ON, but the engine is not
cally shows the view behind the vehicle on running, the battery may discharge.
the display.
Do not leave the ignition switch in the
WARNING “ON” position or the ignition mode
ON for a long time when the engine is
The distance viewed in the rearview not running. EXAMPLE (1)
camera may differ from the actual
64MS144
distance according to the condition
of road or the load the vehicle is car- (1) Rearview camera
rying. Since the camera display area The rearview camera is installed beside
is also limited, backing up by only the license plate light.
looking at the display may cause an
accident or a collision with an object. NOTICE
The rearview camera cannot replace The rearview camera is a precision
the driver’s attention. The driver instrument. If you strike the camera,
alone is responsible for parking and it may break and cause damage
similar driving maneuvers. resulting in fire or a malfunction.
• Use the rearview camera only to
provide driving assistance. • Do not strike the camera.
• Always drive carefully confirming • Do not remove snow or mud on the
the safety of the rear and the sur- camera lens with a stick.
rounding conditions by looking
directly with your eyes and using
the rear view mirror.
• Make sure that the tailgate is
securely closed when backing up.

3-24

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

How to Use Rearview Camera Example of display range of rearview

NOTICE 1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” camera
position or press the engine switch to
If water enters the rearview camera, it change the ignition mode to ON.
may cause a malfunction or catch EXAMPLE (1)
2) Shift the gearshift lever in the “R” posi-
fire. tion.
• The display automatically shows the
Do not use high pressure water view behind the vehicle.
around the camera. • When the gearshift lever is shifted
from “R” to another gearshift lever
NOTICE position, the display returns to the
previous display.
The camera lens is hard coated to
prevent damage or discoloration. NOTE: 61MM0A015
Damage or discoloration of lens may • Images shown on the display from the
obscure the image. rearview camera are reversed images
(mirror images). EXAMPLE
(1)
• Do not use a brush to clean lens. • The colors of objects on the rearview
• Do not use alcohol, benzene or camera may differ from the actual object
thinner to clean the lens. colors.
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. • The rearview camera display has first
priority in any display mode. However,
NOTE: the rearview camera display does not
If body wax does get on the camera lens, show the rear view while the system is
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp- initializing.
ened with mild detergent diluted with Display Range of Rearview Camera
water, then wipe with a dry cloth. The rearview camera display shows the
area behind the rear end of the tailgate. 61MM0B012
The display cannot show objects which are
close to the bumper or under the bumper. (1) Display range
The rearview camera display cannot show NOTE:
obstacles which are higher than the cam- • Images shown on the display from the
era. Upper parts of tall objects such as rearview camera are reversed images
road signs cannot be viewed on the dis- (mirror images).
play.

3-25

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

• The colors of objects on the rearview Uphill Incline behind the Vehicle Downhill Incline behind the vehicle
camera may differ from the actual object
colors. EXAMPLE
(1)
• The rearview camera display may be dif- (1)
ficult to see under the following condi-
tions, but this is not a system
malfunction.
– In dark areas, on a rainy day or at
night. (3)
– When the temperature around the lens (2)
EXAMPLE
is too high/low, or the camera is wet (3) (2)
such as on a rainy day or during peri- 61MM0A016 61MM0A017
ods of high humidity (dew condensa-
tion may occur on the camera lens). (1) Object (1) Object
– When a foreign object such as mud or (2) Actual distance (2) Actual distance
a drop of water is stuck around the (3) Distance on the display (3) Distance on the display
camera lens. When there is an uphill incline behind the When there is a downhill incline behind the
– When strong light directly enters the vehicle, the object shown on the display vehicle, the object shown on the display
camera (vertical lines may be seen on appears farther away than the actual dis- appears closer than the actual distance.
the display). tance.
– Under fluorescent light. (The display
may flicker.)
– When the outside temperature is low
(the image on the display may be
darkened).

Example of rearview camera screen

indication
The distance viewed in the rearview cam-
era may differ from the actual distance
according to the condition of the road or
the load the vehicle is carrying.

3-26

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

If the rear view from the rearview cam- Braking

era is not shown or there is a poor WARNING
image
• If the rear view from the rearview camera If water gets into the brake devices,
is not shown. brake performance may become poor
– Check to make sure that the ignition and unpredictable. After driving
switch is in the “ON” position or the through water or washing the under
ignition mode is “ON”. side of the vehicle, test the brakes
– Check to make sure that the gearshift while driving at a slow speed to see if
lever is shifted to the “R” position. they have maintained their normal
• If the image from the rearview camera is effectiveness. If the brakes are less
poor. effective than normal, dry them by
– Check to make sure that the camera driving slowly until the brakes have
lens is not dirty.
60G165A regained their normal effectiveness.
– Check to make sure that light from the The distance needed to bring any vehicle to
sun or the beam of the headlights from a halt increases with the speed of the vehi- Power-Assisted Brakes (if
the vehicle behind is not shining cle. The braking distance needed, for exam- equipped)
directly into the lens. ple, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If
approximately 4 times greater than the power assistance is lost due to a stalled
If the rearview camera system is still not braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19 engine or other failures, the system is still
working properly after checking the above, mph). Start to brake the vehicle when there fully operational on reserve power and you
have the system inspected by an authorised is plenty of distance between your vehicle can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by
Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon as and the stopping point, and slow down
possible. pressing the brake pedal once and holding
gradually. it down. The reserve power is partly used
up when you depress the brake pedal and
reduces each time the pedal is pressed.
Apply smooth and even pressure to the
pedal. Do not pump the pedal.

WARNING
Even without reserve power in the
brake system, you can still stop the
vehicle by pressing the brake pedal
harder than normally required. How-
ever, the stopping distance may be
longer.

3-27

64MS0-74E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Brake Assist System (if equipped)

When you slam the brakes on, the brake WARNING
assist system judges as an emergency
stop and provides more powerful braking • On some types of loose surfaces
(such as gravel, snow-covered
for a driver who cannot hold down the roads, etc.) the stopping distance
brake pedal firmly. required for an ABS-equipped vehi-
NOTE: cle may be slightly greater than for (1)
If you quickly and forcefully depress the a comparable vehicle with a con- (2)
brakes, you may hear a clicking sound in ventional brake system. With a con-
the brake pedal. This is normal and indi- ventional brake system, skidding 63J081

cates that the brake assist system is acti- tires are able to plow the gravel or (1) ABS warning light
vated properly. snow layer, shortening the stop- (2) Brake system warning light
ping distance. ABS minimizes this
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resistance effect. Allow for extra
(if equipped) stopping distance when driving on
ABS will help in avoiding locking of the loose surfaces.
wheel by electronically controlling braking • On regular paved roads, some driv-
pressure. It will also help you maintain ers may be able to obtain slightly
steering control when braking on slippery shorter stopping distances with
conventional brake systems than
surfaces or when braking hard” with ABS.
The ABS works automatically, so you do • In both of the above conditions,
not need any special braking technique. ABS will still offer the advantage of
Just push the brake pedal down without helping you maintain directional
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever control. However, remember that
it senses that the wheels are locking up. ABS will not compensate for bad
You may feel the brake pedal moves a little road or weather conditions or poor
while the ABS is operating. driver judgment. Use good judg-
ment and do not drive faster than
conditions will safely allow.
NOTE:
The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is
under about 10 km/h (6 mph).

3-28

64MS0-74E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

How the ABS Works

WARNING A computer continuously monitors wheel
• If the ABS warning light (1) on the speed. The computer compares the
instrument panel comes on and changes in wheel speed when braking. If
stays on while driving, there may the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a
be a problem with the ABS system. skidding situation, the computer will
Ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki change braking pressure several times
workshop to inspect the ABS each second to prevent the wheels from
system immediately. If the ABS locking. When you start your vehicle or
system becomes inoperative, the when you accelerate after a hard stop, you
brake system will function as an may hear a momentary motor or clicking
ordinary brake system that has no noise as the system resets or checks
ABS. itself." This is absolutely normal and indi-
• If the ABS warning light (1) and the cates that ABS is functioning properly"
Brake system warning light (2) on
the instrument panel simultane- WARNING
ously stays on or comes on when
driving, both anti-lock function and The ABS may not work properly if
rear brake force control function tires or wheels other than those
(proportioning valve function) of specified in the owner’s manual are
the ABS system may have failed. If used. This is because the ABS works
so, the rear wheels may easily skid by comparing changes in wheel
or the vehicle can even spin in speed. When replacing tires or
the worst case when braking on a wheels, use only the size and type
slippery road or when hard specified in this owner’s manual.
braking even on a dry paved road.
Ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop to inspect the ABS
system immediately. Drive care-
fully, avoiding hard braking as
much as possible.

3-29

64MS0-74E
 DRIVING TIPS

DRIVING TIPS
Running-in ........................................................................... 4-1
Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 4-1
Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 4-2
Highway Driving .................................................................. 4-3
Driving on Hills .................................................................... 4-3
Driving on Slippery Roads ................................................. 4-4
Do’s and Dont’s for Safe Driving....................................... 4-6

64MS0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

Running-in Catalytic Converter

NOTICE
The future performance and reliabil-
ity of the engine depends on the care
and restraint exercised during its
early life. It is especially important to
observe the following precautions
during the initial 960 km (600 miles)
of vehicle operation.
• After starting, do not race the
engine. Warm it up gradually.
80G106
52D078 • Avoid prolonged vehicle operation
at a constant speed. Moving parts The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
WARNING will break in better if you vary your minimize the amount of harmful po llutants
speed. in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded
• WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS AT ALL • Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid fuel in veh icles equipped with cat alytic
TIMES.. Even though air bags are full throttle starts. converters is prohibited, because lead
equipped at the front seating posi- • Avoid hard braking, especially deactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-
tions, the driver and all passengers during the first 320 km (200 miles) nents of the catalyst system.
should be properly restrained at all of driving.
times, using the seat belts pro- The converter is designed to last the life of
• Do not drive slowly with the trans- the vehicle under normal usage and when
vided. Refer to the “Seat Belts and axle in a high gear.
Child Restraint Systems” section unleaded fuel is used. No speci al mainte-
• Drive the vehicle at moderate nance is re quired on th e converter. How-
for instructions on proper use of engine speeds.
the seat belts. ever, it is very important to keep the engine
• Do not tow a trailer during the first properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can
• Never drive while under the influ- 960 km (600 miles) of vehicle oper-
ence of alcohol or other drugs. result from an improperly tuned engine,
ation. may cause overheating of th e catalyst.
Alcohol and drugs can seriously
impair your ability to drive safely, This may result in permanent heat damage
greatly increasing the risk of injury to the catalyst and other ve hicle compo-
to yourself and others. You should nents.
also avoid driving when you are
tired, sick, irritated, or under
stress.

4-1

64MS0-74E
 DRIVING TIPS

Improving Fuel Economy

NOTICE The following instructions wil l help you
To minimize the possibility of catalyst improve fuel economy.
or other vehicle damage: Avoid excessive idling
• Maintain the engine in the proper If you are to wait for more than a minute
operating condition. while you are parked, stop the engine and
• In the event of an engine malfunc- start it again later. When warming up a
tion, particularly one involving cold engine, allow the engine to idle until
engine misfire or other apparent the temperature gauge pointer comes up
loss of performance, have the vehi- to the “C” po sition (if the id ling is not pro-
cle serviced promptly. hibited). In this position, the engine is suffi-
• Do not turn off the engine or inter- ciently warm for starting off.
rupt the ignition when the transaxle
is in gear and the vehicle is in 54G584S Avoid fast starts
motion. Fast starts away from lights or stop signs
• Do not try to start the engine by WARNING will consume fuel unnecessarily and
pushing or towing the vehicle, or shorten engine life. Start off slowly.
coasting down a hill. Be careful where you park and drive;
the catalytic converter and other Avoid unnecessary stops
• Do not idle the engine with any Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-
spark plug wires disconnected or exhaust components can get very
hot. As with any vehicle, do not park ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed
removed, such as during diagnos- whenever possible. Slowing down and
tic testing. or operate this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry then accelerating again uses more fuel.
• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-
longed periods if idling seems grass or leaves can come in contact Keep a steady cruising speed
rough or there are other malfunc- with hot exhaust system compo- Keep as constant a speed as road and
tions. nents. traffic conditions will permit.
• Do not allow the fuel tank to get
Keep weight to a minimum
near the empty level.
The heavier the load, more the fuel vehicle
consumes. Take out any luggage or cargo
when it is not necessary.
Keep tire pressures correct
Underinflation of the tires can wa ste fuel
due to increased running resistance of the
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct

4-2

64MS0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

pressure shown on the label on the driver’s Driving on Hills While moving uphill/gradient from a
side door or the driver’s door lock pillar. stand still condition
• Apply the parking brake firmly so that the
Highway Driving vehicle does not roll backwards.
When driving at highway speeds, pay
• Depress the Cl utch pedal and Shift the
attention to the following:
gearshift lever to 1st Select position.
• Stopping distance progressively
increases with vehicle speed. Apply the • Do not slip the clutch.
• When ready to start, press accelerator
brakes far enough ahead of the stopping pedal and slowly release the clutch
point to allow for the e xtra stopping dis- pedal simultaneously. When the vehicle
tance. starts to move, g radually release the
• On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur. parking brake.
Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contact
between the ro ad surface and the vehi-
cle’s tires due to a water film forming NOTICE
between them. S teering or braki ng the When descending a down hill,
64MS171
vehicle while hydroplaning can be very NEVER turn the ignition key to the
difficult, and loss of control can occur. • When climbing steep hills, the vehicle “LOCK” position or press the engine
Keep speed down when the road sur- may begin to slow down and show a lack switch to change the ignition mode to
face is wet. of power. If thi s happens, you should LOCK (OFF). Emission control sys-
• At high speeds, the vehicle may be shift to a lo wer gear so that the e ngine tem damage may result.
affected by side win ds. Therefore, will again be operating in its normal
reduce speed and be prepared for unex- power range. Shift rapidly to prevent the
pected buffeting, which can occur at the vehicle from losing momentum.
exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut • When driving down a hill , the engine
of a hill, or when being overtaken by should be used for braking by shifting to
large vehicles, etc. next lower gear.

WARNING
Try not to hold the brake pedal down
too long or too often while going
down a steep or long hill. This could
cause the brakes to overheat, result-
ing in reduced braking efficiency.
Failure to take this precaution could
result in loss of vehicle control.

4-3

64MS0-74E
 DRIVING TIPS

Driving on Slippery Roads Tire Chains If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Tire chains should only be used if they are If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, or
needed to increase traction or are required sand, follow the directions below:
by law. Make sure that the chains you use
are the correct size for your vehicle’s tires. 1) Shift the transaxle back and forth
Also make sure that there is enough clear- between first gear and reverse. This will
ance between the fenders and the chains create a rocking motion which may give
as installed on the tires. you enough momentum to free the
vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator
Install the chains on the front ti res tightly, to keep wheel spinning to a minimum
according to the ch ain manufacturer’s wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the
instructions. Retighten the chains after accelerator while shifting.
driving about 1.0 km (1/2 mil e) if neces- Do not r ace the engine. Excessive
sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly. wheel spin will cause the tires to d ig
deeper, making it more di fficult to free
60G089A NOTICE the vehicle.
Under wet road conditions you should • If you hear the chains hitting 2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few
drive at a low er speed than on dry ro ads against the vehicle body while driv- minutes of rocking, we recommend you
due to possible slippage of tire s during ing, stop and tighten them. to consult your authorised Maruti
braking. When driving on icy , snow-cov- • If your vehicle is equipped with full Suzuki workshop or a roadside assis-
ered, or mud dy roads, reduce your speed wheel caps, remove the wheel caps tance service. If a towing service is not
and avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt before installing the chains or the available in an emergency, your vehicle
braking, or sharp steering movements. wheel caps can be damaged by the may be temporarily towed by a towing
chain bands. cable or cha in secured to the towi ng
hook either on the front of the vehicle or
on the rear of the vehicle. Refer to
“Frame Hooks” in the “OTHER CON-
TROLS AND EQUIPMENT” section.

4-4

64MS0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

WARNING NOTICE WARNING

Do not allow anyone to stand near • When driving on wet roads, avoid In addition to following the driving
the vehicle when you are rocking it, driving through large amount of tips in this section, it is important to
and do not spin the wheels faster standing water on the road. Large observe the following precautions.
than an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph) amount of water entering the • Make sure your tires are in good
on the speedometer. Personal injury engine compartment may cause condition and always maintain the
and/ or vehicle damage may result damage to the engine and or elec- specified tire pressure. Refer to
from spinning the wheels too fast. trical components. “Tires” in the “INSPECTION” AND
• If stuck in deep water, do not start MAINTENANCE” section for
the engine. details.
NOTICE • Water is incompressible substance, • Never use oversized tires or spe-
water inside engine will damage the cial shock absorbers and springs
Do not continue rocking the vehicle engine. to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This
for more than a few minutes. Pro- will change the handling character-
longed rocking can cause engine istics. Oversized tires may also rub
overheating or transaxle damage. against the fender over bumps,
causing vehicle damage or tire fail-
ure
• After driving through water, test the
brakes while driving at a slow
speed to see if they have main-
tained their normal, dry them by
repeatedly applying the brakes
while driving slowly until the
brakes have regained their normal
effectiveness.
• Do not use tires other than those
specified by MARUTI SUZUKI.
Never use different sizes or types
of tires on the front and rear
wheels. For information regarding
54G638
the specified tires, refer to the Tire
information Label located on the
driver’s door lock pillar.

4-5

64MS0-74E
 DRIVING TIPS

Do’s and Dont’s for Safe 4) Don’t start quickly, since it is dangerous 5) When overtaking other vehicles, watch
and wastes fuel. out for the oncoming vehicle and care-
Driving fully confirm the safety.
Exercise care in handling your vehicle. Be General driving 6) Don’t attempt zigzag driving which will
conscious of not only your own safety but 1) Be sure to stop before the stop light and hinder your control over the vehicle and
also the safety of others on the road, and stop sign. When moving into the inter- cause an accident.
thus enjoy the best and most comfortable section without any traffic lights or
driving experience. signs, drive slowly to confirm safety.

This section contains basic rules for safe

driving. Read it carefully for good under-
standing of the content so that you can
enjoy safe and pleasant driving in your
vehicle.

72F-08-008

2) Always follow other vehicles at a safe

distance in order to prevent a rear-end
collision, in case the vehicle ahead
72F-08-002
make a sudden stop.
3) Turn ON the turn signal at least 30
Starting meters before making a turn or chang- 72F-08-011
1) Adjust the driver’s seat for the proper ing the lane so as not to be hit from
driving posture. behind. Braking
2) Adjust the rear view mirror so as to 4) Before entering a corner, decelerate to 1) Use the parking brake when parking
obtain the best possible rear view. a safe speed. Don’t apply brakes during your vehicle and shift the gear shift
3) Before moving off, look forward and cornering, or a cornering skid may lever into the first gear or reverse gear
back to confirm safety. occur. position for the sake of safety.

4-6

64MS0-74E
DRIVING TIPS

2) Don’t use hand-braking unless una- Long distance driving

voidable. It causes the vehicle to skid 1) Be sure to perform safety checks before
and a rearend collision occur. It is espe- starting a trip.
cially dangerous when the tyres are 2) Take rest at certain intervals to prevent
worn, for they allow a larger skid. an accident which may occur when you
are sleepy or tired.

72F-08-015

5) The higher the speed, the narrower the

driver’s visual range becomes. In such
a state, it is difficult to anticipate any
hazard and the driver feels much
72F-08-012
fatigued.
6) Never do sharp handling during high 72F-08-020
Use foot brake in three stages speed driving. You will lose your control
1. Warn the vehicle behind you over your vehicle. Night time driving
2. Gradually apply the brake. 7) When overtaking or changing the lane 1) Drive more slowly at night than in the
3. Bring the vehicle to a halt. while driving at a high speed, keep an daytime, for the visual range is
3) When driving on a downhill, try not to ample vehicle-to-vehicle distance. restricted at night.
apply the brake but use the engine 2) Don’t overtake other vehicles at night.
brake effectively. Overuse of the foot Darkness bothers your sense of speed
brake may result in total brake failure. and hinders your judgment on the vehi-
4) Avoid reckless high speed driving and cle-to-vehicle distance.
try to drive at a safe speed suitable for 3) Don’t use the high headlight beam
the road conditions while maintaining a unless its use is inevitable. Its dazzle
constant speed. may blitz the driver of the oncoming
vehicle, thus causing an accident.
4) Always keep the window glasses clean.
Don’t operate the windshield wiper

4-7

64MS0-74E
 DRIVING TIPS

when the windshield glass is dry or the Margin For Safety

wiper blade and glass may get dam- It is important to allow yourself a margin for
aged. safety during driving so that you can cope
with erroneous or unexpected driving of other
drivers. For that, observe the following.
• Drive at a safe speed.
• Maintain a sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
• Don’t force yourself to overtake other
vehicles.
• Don’t make quick start, hard steering or
sudden stops.
• Allow an ample time in the driving
schedule.
• Observe traffic rules and regulations.
Conclusion
72F-08-021 A perfect driver does not exist. The
endeavour of every motorist should be to
strive for perfection. Safety consciousness
not only ensures your safety and the safety
of other road users, it also helps reduce
the wear and tear on your vehicle, prolongs
its life, gives more mileage and ensures a
comfortable driving experience.
Follow the do’s and don’ts listed, and
driving will never be the same again.

72F-08-022

4-8

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Fuel Filler Door / Cap .......................................................... 5-1
Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-2
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-4
Interior Light ........................................................................ 5-5
Accessory Socket ............................................................... 5-7
Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-8
Glove Box ............................................................................ 5-9
Overhead Console (if equipped) ........................................ 5-9
Cup Holder and Storage Area ............................................ 5-11
Footrest (if equipped) ......................................................... 5-14
Floor Mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-14
Luggage Compartment Hooks ........................................... 5-15
Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped) ..................... 5-15
Luggage Compartment Board ........................................... 5-15
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped) ............... 5-16
Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-17
Air Conditioning System .................................................... 5-20
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ................. 5-21
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System
(Climate Control) ................................................................. 5-26
Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-31
Installation of Radio Frequency Transmitters .................. 5-31
Audio System (if equipped) ................................................ 5-32

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Fuel Filler Door / Cap

EXAMPLE (1)
EXAMPLE

(3)

Open Close

(1) (1)

EXAMPLE (2)

57L51093
61MM0B104
To remove the fuel filler cap:
64MS137 1) Open the fuel filler lid. NOTE:
2) Remove the cap by turning it counter- The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap
EXAMPLE clockwise. (2) by hooking the cap to the groove (3)
when refueling.
CAUTION
To reinstall the fuel filler cap:
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The 1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear
fuel may be under pressure and may several clicks.
spray out, causing injury. 2) Close the fuel filler lid.

WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not
smoke when refueling, and make
sure there are no open flames or
64MS070 sparks in the area.
The fuel filler cap is located on the left rear
side of the vehicle. The fuel filler lid can be
unlocked by pull ing up the opener lever
located on the outboard side of the driver’s
seat and locked by simply closing the door.

5-1

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Engine Hood
WARNING EXAMPLE
If you need to replace the fuel filler
cap, use a MARUTI genuine cap. Use
of an improper cap can result in a
malfunction of the fuel system or
emission control system. It may also
result in fuel leakage in the event of
an accident.

EXAMPLE 64MS126
64MS138 2) Pull the under-hood release lever side-
To open the engine hood: ways with your fing er, as sh own in the
1) Pull the hood release handle located on illustration. While pulling the l ever, lift
the outboard side of the driver’s side of up the engine hood.
the instrument panel. This will disen-
gage the engine hood lock halfway. CAUTION
The release lever can be hot enough
to burn your finger right after driving.
Touch the lever after it becomes cool
enough.

NOTICE
Make sure that the wiper arms are not
raised before you lift up the engine
hood to avoid damaging the wiper
arms and the engine hood.

5-2

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

To close the engine hood:

EXAMPLE 1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the CAUTION
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod
back to the holding clip. To avoid injury, be sure no part of the
occupant’s body such as hands or
EXAMPLE head is in the path of the hood when
closing it.

NOTICE
Pressing the hood from above may
damage the hood.

64MS127

3) While holding the hood, pull the prop

rod out from the holding clip, then insert
the end of the rod into the designated
hole in the hood. 64MS128

CAUTION 2) Lower the ho od to ab out 20 cm ab ove

the hood latch, then let i t drop down.
• The prop rod can be hot enough to Make sure the hood is securely latched
burn your finger right after driving. after closing.
Touch the rod after it becomes cool
enough. WARNING
• Insert the end of the rod into the
hole securely. If the rod drops off, Make sure the hood is fully closed
your body may be caught in the and latched before driving. If it is not,
hood. it can fly up unexpectedly during
• The rod may drop off when the driving, obstructing your view and
hood is hit by a wind. Be careful on resulting in an accident.
windy days.

5-3

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Sun Visor Card holder (if equipped) Vanity mirror (if equipped)
Type A EXAMPLE (4)
EXAMPLE

(3)
64MS076
(1) EXAMPLE
67LH064
(3) Vanity mirror
(4) Vanity mirror light (if equipped)
Type B
77PH004 To use the vanity mirror (3) on th e back of
(2) the sun visor, pull up the mirror cover (1).
The sun visors can be pulled down to block
glare coming through the windshield, or The vanity mirror light (4) comes on when
they can be unhooked and tu rned to the the mirror cover (1) is opened.
side to block glare coming through the side
window.
WARNING
• Do not use the mirror while driving
NOTICE your could lose control of the vehi-
EXAMPLE (1) cle.
When unhooking and hooking a sun • When using the vanity mirror, do
64MS172
visor, be sure to handle it by the hard not move too close to a front air
plastic part or the sun visor may get (1) Card holder
(2) Mirror cover bag location or lean against it. If
damaged. the front air bag is accidentally
You can put a card in the card holder (1) on inflated, it could hit you hard.
the back of the sun visor.

NOTICE NOTICE
If the vanity mirror has the light, do
When you park your vehicle outdoors
in direct sunlight or in hot weather, not leave the mirror cover open for a
do not leave plastic cards in the long time, or the battery will dis-
charge.
holder. The heat may distort them.

5-4

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Interior Light Glove Box Light (if equipped) (1)

EXAMPLE Refer to “Glove Box” in this section.
EXAMPLE Footwell Lights (if equipped) (2)
(1)
A footwell light is provided in the leg space
in front of each front seat. When any door
(including the tailgate) is open, the footwell
lights on both sides light automatically.
NOTE:
You can change the footwell lights opera-
tion via the information display. Refer to
(4) / (5) “Information Display” in the “BEFORE
DRIVING” section.
(6) Instrument Panel Pocket Light
(2) (3) (2) (if equipped) (3)
64MS118 This light comes on while the po sition
lights, tail light and/or the headlights are
(1) Glove box light (if equipped) on.
(2) Footwell lights (if equipped)
(3) Instrument panel pocket light (7)
(if equipped)

64MS078

(4) Front (without overhead console)

(5) Front (with overhead console)
(6) Center
(7) Luggage compartment (if equipped)

5-5

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front (without overhead console) (4) Front (with overhead console) (5) ON (a)
• The light comes on and stays on regard-
EXAMPLE less of whether the door is open or
closed.
• To save the battery, the light will be auto-
matically turned off when a period of 15
minutes has elapsed after the light is on.
DOOR (b)
• The light comes on when the door is
opened. After closing all doors, the light
61MM0A205 will remain on for about 15 seconds and
Push the switch to turn on the light and then fade out. If you insert the key, or
push it again to turn off the light. press the engine switch to cha nge the
(d) (c) (b) (a) (d) ignition mode to ACC or ON during this
time, the light will start to fade out imme-
64MS119 diately. After removing the key from the
ignition switch, th e light will turn on for
Center (6) about 15 seconds and then fade out.
• Regardless of whether the door is op en
EXAMPLE (c) (b) (a) or closed, the light comes on 15 seconds
and then fade out when the ignition
mode is changed to LOCK (OFF) or the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position.
OFF (c)
The light remains off even when the door is
opened.
SPOT LIGHT (d)
61MM0A107
When the light switch is i n the D OOR or
These light switches have th ree or four OFF position, push th e switch to turn on
positions with function as described below: the light and push it a gain to turn off the
light.

5-6

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Luggage Compartment Accessory Socket

(if equipped) (7) EXAMPLE Center console
EXAMPLE

(2) (1) 61MM0A108

61MM0B023 NOTE: 64MS080

When you o pen the tailgate with the l ug- The number of doors involved in the light-
gage compartment light switch in the ON ing operation of the interior light depends
position (1), the light comes on and on the vehicle specification. If there is a
remains on as long as you keep the tail- switch (rubber projection) at the door
gate open. opening as shown, the door is involved in
When the luggage compartment light the lighting operation. The tailgate is also
switch is in the OFF position (2), the light involved in this operation even without the
remains off regardless of whethe r the tail- rubber projection.
gate is open or close.

NOTICE
Do not leave the tailgate open with
the luggage compartment light
switch in the ON position for a long
time, or the battery will discharge.

5-7

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Luggage compartment (if equipped) Assist Grips (if equipped) Coat Hooks (if equipped)
EXAMPLE

61MM0B025

You can hang clothing on the coat hoo ks.

These hooks are not designed for large or
54G249
heavy items.
64MS147 Assist grips are provided for convenience.
The accessory socket will work when the WARNING
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi- NOTICE
If your vehicle is equipped with side
tion, or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”. To avoid damaging the assist grip curtain air bags, do not hang sharp
Each socket can be use d to provide 12 and the molded headlining, do not items like a hanger on the coat hook.
volt/120 watt/10 ampere power for electri- hang down on the assist grip. When hanging the clothes, hang
cal accessories when used alone. Make
them on the hook without using a
sure that the cap remain s on the socke t
hanger.
when the socket is not in use.

NOTICE
• To prevent the fuse from being
blown, when using sockets at the
same time, do not exceed the total
combined power capacity of 12
volt/120 watt/10 ampere.
• Use of inappropriate electrical
accessories can cause damage to
your vehicle’s electrical system.
Make sure that any electrical
accessories you use are designed
to plug into this type of socket.

5-8

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Glove Box Overhead Console

EXAMPLE
(if equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

64MS148

64MS120 The glove box light (if equipped) stays on (1)

while the lid is open. 64MS121
To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.
To close it, push the l id until it latches Use this stowage to keep small articles.
securely. You can op en the lid (1) by pre ssing the
raised portion on it.
WARNING
Never drive with the glove box lid
open. It could cause injury if an acci-
dent occurs.

5-9

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

WARNING
• Do not drive with the overhead con-
sole lid open, or the articles stowed
inside could fall down during brak-
ing, acceleration or in the event of
a collision. Always close the lid
after putting something into or tak-
ing something out of the console.
• If you park your vehicle outdoors in
direct sunlight or in hot weather,
the overhead console can get very
hot since it is close to the roof. So,
when parking in such conditions:
– Do not leave eyeglasses in the
overhead console. The heat may
distort plastic lenses or frames.
– Do not place flammable items,
such as a lighter, in the overhead
console. The heat may cause a
fire.

NOTICE
• Do not apply undue force to the lid
when closing it. Doing so could
break the lid and articles inside.
• Place glasses in a case when stow-
ing them in the overhead console,
or the lenses may be damaged.

5-10

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Cup Holder and Storage Area Instrument Panel Pocket (1)

WARNING
EXAMPLE
Do not place any objects which may
fall out from the pocket when the
vehicle is moving.
(1) (2) (3) (6) (7) (8) Failure to take the precaution may
result in an object interfering with the
(4) (5) pedals and causing a loss of vehicle
control or an accident.
Front Cup Holders (2)
WARNING
Failure to take the precautions listed
below could cause personal injury or
vehicle damage.
• Be careful when you are using the
cup holders to hold a cup contain-
(5) ing hot liquid. Spilling out hot liq-
uid can cause burn injury.
(3) (6) (8) • Do not use the cup holders to hold
sharp-edged, hard, or breakable
objects. Objects in the cup holders
may be thrown about during a sud-
den stop or impact, and could
64MS081
cause personal injury.
(1) Instrument panel pocket (2) Front cup holders • Be careful not to spill liquid or
(3) Front bottle holder (4) Front armrest with console box (if equipped) insert any foreign materials into the
moving part of the gearshift lever,
(5) Front seat back pocket (6) Rear bottle holder or any electrical components. Liq-
(7) Rear armrest with cup holders (8) Luggage compartment pocket uid or foreign materials may dam-
(if equipped) age these parts.

5-11

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front Bottle Holder (3) / AUX/USB socket (if equipped)

Rear Bottle Holder (6) EXAMPLE (1) EXAMPLE
You should hold a bottle with a ca p in the
holder. (1)

Front Armrest with Console Box

(if equipped) (4)
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the armrest, do
not lean on it or allow a child to sit on
it.
61MM0B030

NOTE:
EXAMPLE Always close the lid after you put something
into or take something out of the box. 64MS082

The AUX/USB socket is provided in the

console box.
Connect your portable digital music player,
etc. to this socket to enjoy music through
the vehicle’s audio system using it as a
source. Refer to “Audio System” in this
section.

NOTICE
Do not place any objects in console
61MM0B029 box which may spill water or liquid.
Spilling of liquid on AUX/USB socket
The armrest can be slid forward.
can cause damage malfunction of
Console box AUX/USB socket.
Use this stowage for keeping small items.
Open the comp artment by ra ising the top
lid while keeping the lever (1) up.

5-12

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front Seat Back Pocket (5) Rear Armrest with Cup Holders Luggage Compartment Pocket (8)
(if equipped) (7)

EXAMPLE
(1)

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE (1) 61MM0B034

64MS083
64MS158 To open the lid, slide the lever (1) and pu ll
(1) Cup holders the lid.
This pocket is provide d for ho lding light
and soft things such as g loves, newspa- The rear armrest is stowed in the center of
pers or magazines. the seatback. Tilt it down forward to use.
CAUTION WARNING
Do not put hard or breakable objects • If the seat belt is obstructed by any
in the pocket. If an accident occurs, part of the armrest when fastened,
objects such as bottles, cans, etc. it cannot provide the intended pro-
can injure the occupants in the rear tection. After fastening the seat
seat. belt, always check that the armrest
is not interfering with the belt.
• In an accident or sudden stop, the
rear seat armrest could fall for-
ward. If there is a child in a rear-fac-
ing child restraint in the rear center
seating position, the falling armrest
could injure the child. Do not install
a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear center seating position.

5-13

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Footrest (if equipped) Floor Mats (if equipped)

WARNING
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Failure to take the following precau-
tions may result in the driver’s side
floor mat interfering with the pedals
and causing a loss of vehicle control
or an accident.
• Make sure that the floor mat grom-
mets are hooked to the fasteners.
• Never place additional floor mats
on top of the existing floor mat.
(1)

58MST0509 64MS085

Use the footrest (1) as a supp ort for your To prevent the driver’s side floor mat from
left foot. sliding forward and possibly interfering with
the operation of the pedals, MARUTI genu-
ine floor mats are recommended.
Whenever you pu t the drive r’s side floor
mat back in the vehicle after it ha s been
removed, be su re to hoo k the floor mat
grommets to the fasteners and position the
floor mat properly in the footwell.
When you replace the floor mats in your
vehicle with a different type such as all-
weather floor mats, we highly recommend
using MARUTI genuine floor mats for
proper fitting.

5-14

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Luggage Compartment Hooks Luggage Compartment Cover Luggage Compartment Board

Shopping Hook (if equipped)
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE
64MS086 64MS088
64MS087
You can ha ng the shopping bag or other Your vehicle is equipped with the luggage
suitable objects on the hook. Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug- compartment board in the luggage com-
This hook is not desig ned for large or gage compartment is hidden from view by partment. You can place luggage or other
heavy items. a luggage compartment cover. cargos on the board or under the b oard.
You can also place tall luggage by remov-
NOTICE WARNING ing the b oard from the l uggage compart-
Do not carry items on top of the lug- ment.
To avoid breaking the hook, do not
hang items heavier than following gage compartment cover, even if they
weight. are small and light. Objects on top of WARNING
Shopping hook: 2 kg (4.4 lbs) the cover could be thrown about in
an accident, causing injury, or could Objects that extend higher than the
obstruct the driver’s rear view. luggage compartment cover (if
equipped) can obstruct the driver’s
rear view, which can cause an acci-
dent. These objects can also become
damaged or can damage the tailgate.
Do not carry items that extend higher
than the luggage compartment cover.

5-15

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Roof Rails or Roof Rack Roof rack anchors

CAUTION EXAMPLE
Anchors (if equipped)
If you are not careful when handling
the luggage board, you could be Roof rails
injured.

Handle the luggage board carefully

when removing or installing it.

80J082

64MS139 You can use the roof rails or the roof rack
anchors to attach the optional roof rack
which is available at your MARUTI
SUZUKI NEXA dealer / authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop. If you use a
roof rack, observe the instructions and
EXAMPLE precautions in this section and provided
with the roof rack.
61MM0B036
• Make sure the roof rack is securely
The luggage compartment board can be installed.
held open as shown in the illustration. • Do not mount cargo directly on the roof
panel. The cargo can damage the roof
NOTICE panel.
• The gross weight of the roof rack plus
Do not apply undue force to the cargo must not exceed the loading
board which is held open, and do not capacity.
hold open the board while driving. – Roof rails: 40 kg (88 lbs)
Doing so could break the board or – Roof rack anchors: 40 kg (88 lbs)
the interior. Also, do not let the gross vehicle weight
(fully loaded vehicle including driver,
passengers, cargo, roof load and trailer

5-16

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

tongue weight) exceed the Gross V ehi- Frame Hooks

cle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed in the WARNING MARUTI SUZUKI does n ot recommend
“SPECIFICATIONS” section of this
• Abrupt maneuvers or failure to you use the frame hooks for towing
manual.
properly secure cargo can allow another vehicle. Your vehicle was originally
• Mount and secure the cargo onto the
the cargo to fly off the vehicle and designed to be towed on the road in case
roof rack prope rly according to the
hit others, causing personal injury of emergency towing. If your vehicle needs
instructions provided. Be sure to stow
or property damage. to be towed in an emergency, refer to
the heaviest items at the bottom and dis-
• Mount cargo securely and avoid “Towing” in “EMERGENCY SERVICE”
tribute the cargo as evenly as possible.
abrupt maneuvers such as jackrab- section.
• Do not carry items so large that they
hang over the bumpers or the sides o f bit starts, sharp turns, fast corner-
the vehicle, or block your view. ing and sudden braking. Check WARNING
• Secure the front and rear ends of lo ng periodically to make sure that
Observe the following instructions
items – such as wood panels, surfboards cargo is securely fastened.
when using frame hooks. The towing
and so forth – to both the front and rear • Large, bulky, long, or flat items can
hook or vehicle body may break and
of the veh icle. You should protect the affect vehicle aerodynamics or be
cause serious injury or damage.
painted surfaces of th e vehicle from caught by the wind, and can reduce
• Do not use the frame hooks for
scuffing caused by tie-down ropes. vehicle control resulting in an acci-
towing another vehicle.
• Check periodically to make sure the roof dent and personal injury. Drive cau-
• Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out
rack is secure ly installed and free from tiously at a safely reduced speed
of severe snowy, muddy or sandy
damage. when carrying this type of cargo.
conditions, sudden starts or erratic
• For vehicles with ro of rack ancho rs, driving maneuvers which could
make sure the anchors are covered with cause excessive stress on the tow-
the caps when not in use. ing hook.
In such case, we recommend that
you contact a professional service.

5-17

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front 1) Pick up the towing hook (1), jack handle

(A) and wheel brace (B) stowe d in the EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE luggage compartment.

EXAMPLE
(1) (C)

(1)

61MM0B041
61MM0B038
(A) 3) Install the towing hook (1) by hand.
The towing hook (1) is provid ed on the
front of the veh icle for u se in e mergency NOTE:
situations only. 61MM0B040 We recommend to fasten the cover with
tape to prevent damage during towing.
To install the hook (1), follow the procedure 2) Remove the cover on b umper (C) by
below. using a jack han dle (A) covered with a
soft cloth as shown in the illustration. EXAMPLE (B)
(1)
(1)
NOTE:
EXAMPLE Do not use excessive force as it may dam-
age the cover strap.

(A)

(B)

61MM0B042

61MM0B039

5-18

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

4) To tighten the towi ng hook (1), turn i t Rear

clockwise by using a wheel brace (B) WARNING
until the hook (1) is securely installed. EXAMPLE Do not use the hooks (3) and (4) for
To remove the towing hook (1), reverse the towing purpose. These hooks may
procedure used to install the towing hook. break and cause serious injury or
damage.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
never use the towing hook (1) for
trailer / train shipping and sea ship-
(2) ping purposes.
64MS140

The frame hook (2) is provided on the rear

of the vehicle for use in emergency situa-
tions and sea shipping purposes only.
Other Hooks

EXAMPLE

(3)

(4)
64MS174

The hooks (3) are provided for trailer/train

shipping purposes only. The hooks (4) are
provided for sea shipping purpose only.

5-19

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Air Conditioning System Side outlet

There are two types of heating and air conditioning systems as follows:
• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
(2) (1)
• Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control) (if equipped)
Air Outlet
OPEN
EXAMPLE
CLOSE
1 1

2
2
60M0014

3 4 Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally,

4 to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
3 Move the dial (2) to open or close the out-
let.
5

64MS159

1. Windshield defroster outlet

2. Side defroster outlet
3. Side outlet
4. Center outlet
5. Floor outlet

5-20

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Center outlet Manual Heating and Air

(1) (1)
Conditioning System
Description of Controls

(2)

1 2 3
0 4

A/C

61MM0B047

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.
(1) (4) (5) (3)

61MM0A018

Temperature selector (1)

This is used to sel ect the temperature by
turning the selector.
Blower speed selector (2)
This is used to turn on the blower and to
select blower speed by turnin g the selec-
tor.

5-21

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Air flow selector (3) Bi-level (b) lets and also comes slightly out of the side
defroster outlets.
Heat & defrost (d)
(c)

(b) (d)

(a) (e)
61M0101

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and cooler air comes out 64MS036
of the center and side outlets. When the
temperature selector (1) is in the fully Temperature-controlled air comes out of
61MM0A019
COLD position or fully HOT po sition, how- the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
This is used to select one of the functions ever, the air from the floor outlets and the outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
described below. air from the center and side outlets will be side outlets.
Ventilation (a) the same temperature. Defrost (e)
Heat (c)

64MS090

61M0100 Temperature-controlled air comes out of

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets, the side
the center and side air outlets. 61M0102 defroster outlets and the side outlets.
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and the si de outlets, also
comes out of the windshield defroster out-

5-22

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Air intake selector (4) Air conditioning switch (5) System Operating Instructions
To turn on the air conditioning system, set
the blower speed selector to the desired Natural ventilation
blower speed position and push in the air Select the VENTILATION position (a) a nd
conditioning switch (5). With the air condi- “FRESH AIR” position (f), the temperature
tioning switch operation, a indicator light will selector to the desired temperature posi-
come on when the air conditioning system tion, and turn off the blower. Fresh air will
(f) (g)
is on. To turn off the air conditioning system, flow through the vehicle during driving.
61MM0A020 push the air conditioning switch again.
Forced ventilation
This selector is used to select the following During operation of the air conditioner, you The control settings are the same as for
modes. may notice slight changes in engine speed. natural ventilation except turning the
These changes are n ormal, the system is blower speed selector to turn on the
Fresh Air (f) designed so that the c ompressor turns on
When this mode is selected, the in dicator blower.
or off to maintain the desired temperature.
light will go off and outside air is circulated Normal heating (using outside air)
inside the cabin. Less operation of th e compressor resul ts
in better fuel economy. Select the HEAT position (c) and “FRESH
Recirculated Air (g) AIR” position (f), th e temperature selector
When this mode is selected, the indicator to the desired temperature position and the
light will come on, outside air is shut out and blower speed selector to the desired
inside air is recirculated. This mode is suit- blower speed position. Setting the blower
able when driving through dusty or polluted speed selector to a higher blower speed
air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting position increases heating efficiency.
to quickly cool down the interior.
Quick heating (using recirculated air)
The "FRESH AIR" position (f) and RECIR- The control settings are the same as for
CULATED AIR air position (g) are switched normal heating except selecting the
alternately each time the air intake selector RECIRCULATED AIR a ir position (g). If
is pushed. you use thi s heating method for an
NOTE: extended period of time, the air in the vehi-
If you select the RECIRCULATED AIR posi- cle can become contaminated and the win-
tion (g) for an extended period of time, the dows can beco me misty. Therefore, use
air in the vehicle can become contaminated. this method only for quick heating and
Therefore, you should occasionally select change to the normal heating method as
the “FRESH AIR” position (f). soon as possible.

5-23

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Head cooled/Feet warmed heating Quick cooling (using recirculated air) Dehumidifying
The control settings are the same as for Set the air flow selector to a desired air flow
Select the BI-LVEL position (b) and “FRESH normal cooling except selecting the RECIR- selector position, the temperature selector
AIR” position (f), the temperature selector to CULATED AIR position (g) and the highest to the desired temperature pos ition and the
the desired te mperature position, and the blower speed. blower speed selector to the desired blower
blower speed selector to the desired blower NOTE: speed position. Also select the “FRESH
speed position. Unless the tempe rature AIR” position (f) and push in the air condi-
selector is in the fully COLD position or fully • If you select the recirculated air position
(g) for an extended period of time, the air tioning switch (5) to turn on the air condi-
HOT position, the air that comes out of the tioning system.
center and side outlets will be cooler than in the vehicle can become contaminated.
the air that comes out of the floor outlets. Therefore, you should occasionally select
the “FRESH AIR” position (f). NOTE:
• If your vehicle has been left in the sun Because the air conditioner dehumidifies
Normal cooling the air, turning it on will help keep the win-
with the windows closed, it will cool faster
Set the air flow selector to the VENTILATION if you open the windows briefly while you dows clear, even when blowing heated air
position (a), th e temperature selector to the operate the air conditioner with the air using the DEFROST position (e) or HEAT &
desired temperature position and the blower intake selector at the “FRESH AIR” posi- DEFROST position (d).
speed selector to the desired blower speed tion (f) and the blower at high speed.
position, and push in the air c onditioning EXAMPLE
switch (5) to turn on the air conditioning sys-
tem. Setting the blower speed selector to a
higher blower speed position increases cool-
ing efficiency.
You can switch the air int ake selector to
either the “F RESH AIR” position (f) or
RECIRCULATED AIR position (g) as you
desire. Choosing the RE CIRCULATED AIR
position (g) increases cooling efficiency.

64MS091

NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting:
• select the DEFROST position (e) and
“FRESH AIR” position (f),
• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,

5-24

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

• adjust the temperature selector to the

HOT end, NOTICE
• push in the air conditioning switch (5) to
turn on the air conditioning system, and Using the wrong refrigerant may
• adjust the side outlets so the air blows damage your air conditioning sys-
on the side windows. tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
replace the R-134a with other refrig-
Maintenance erants.
If you do not use the air conditioner for a
long period, such as during w inter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help m aintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine idling.
This circulates the refrigerant and oil and
helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equ ipped with air
filters, clean or replace them as specified
in the “Maintenance Schedule” in the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
section.
NOTE:
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around
1993 for automotive applications. Other
refrigerants are available, including recy-
cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
in your vehicle.

5-25

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System Temperature selector (1)

(Climate Control) (If equipped)
Description of Controls
(1)
EXAMPLE
(1) (9) (2)

64MS051

Turn the temperature selector to adjust the

temperature. The display (9) shows the
AUTO selected temperature.
A/C REAR
FRONT
OFF MODE NOTE:
If you turn the temperature selector (1)
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,
the climate control system will operate at
maximum heating or cooling. The tempera-
(3) (6) (7) (8) (4) (5) ture of the air from the outlets may change
suddenly while “LO” or “HI” is displayed,
but this is normal.
64MS050

(1) Temperature selector NOTE:

(2) Blower speed selector When you change the units of temperature
(3) Air intake selector in the information display, the automatic
(4) “MODE” switch heating and air conditioning system tem-
(5) Defrost switch perature display units will be changed
(6) Air conditioning switch automatically. Refer to “Information Dis-
(7) “OFF” switch play” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section
(8) “AUTO” switch
(9) Display for details.

5-26

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Blower speed selector (2) Push the air int ake selector (3) to chan ge “MODE” switch (4)
between the following modes.
(c)
If the “AUTO” switch (8) is push ed, the air
(2) intake will vary automatically as the climate
control system maintains the selected tem-
perature. (d)
NOTE: MODE
When you select the recirculated air mode,
the automatic operation system is deacti- (e)
vated if you push the “AUTO” switch (8). (4)
64MS052 RECIRCULATED AIR (a)
The blower speed selector (2) i s used to When this mode is selected, outside air is (f)
turn on the blower and to select bl ower shut off and inside air is recirculated. This
speed. mode is su itable when driving through an 64MS054
area with polluted air such as a tu nnel, or Push the “MODE” switch (4) to change
If the “AUTO” switch (8) is push ed, the when attempting to quickly coo l down the among the following functions. The indica-
blower speed will vary automatically as the vehicle. tion of the selected mode appears on the
climate control syst em maintains the display.
selected temperature. FRESH AIR (b)
When this mode is selected, outside air is If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushe d, the air
Air intake selector (3) introduced. flow will vary automatically as the climate
The “FRESH AIR” position (b) and RECIR- control system maintains the selected tem-
CULATED AIR position (a) are selected perature.
alternately each time the air intake selector
is pushed. Ventilation (c)
NOTE:
(3) If you select the RECIRCULATED AIR
(a) position (a) for an extended period of time,
the air in the vehicle can become contami-
nated. Therefore, you should occasionally
(b) select the “FRESH AIR” position (b).

64MS053
61M0100

5-27

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Temperature-controlled air comes out of Heat & defrost (f) Defrost

the center and side outlets.
Bi-level (d)

61M0103

Temperature-controlled air comes out of 61M0106

61M0101 the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
outlets, the side defroster outlets and the Temperature-controlled air comes out of
Temperature-controlled air comes out of side outlets. the windshield defroster outlets, the side
the floor, center and side outlets. defroster outlets and the side outlets.
Defrost switch (5)
Heat (e) NOTE:
When you push the defrost switch (5), the
fresh air position (b) will be automatically
selected and the air conditioning switch will
automatically turn on (“A/C” will appear on
the display). In cold weather, air flows out of
the defroster outlets but the air conditioning
does not turn on even though the A/C indi-
cator comes on as well as the defrost indi-
FRONT cator.
61M0102

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets, also comes out of the (5)
windshield defroster ou tlets and also 64MS038
comes slightly out of the side defroster out-
lets and the side outlets. Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the
defroster.

5-28

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Air conditioning switch (6) System Operating Instructions NOTE:

If the “AUTO” on the display blinks, there is
Automatic operation a problem in the heating system and/or air
(8) conditioning system. You should have the
system inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.
NOTE:
A/C AUTO
• To find the temperature at which you are
(6) most comfortable, start with the 25°C
(75°F) setting, for example.
OFF MO
• If you turn the temperature selector (1)
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,
64MS055 the climate control system will operate at
(7) maximum heating or cooling.
The air conditioning switch (6) is used to • To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather
turn on and off the air conditioning system 64MS056
only when the blower is on . To turn on the or hot air in hot weather, the system will
air conditioning system, push in the switch; You can let th e climate con trol system delay turning on the blower until warmed
“A/C” will appear on the display and the work automatically. To set the syste m for or chilled air is available.
indicator on the switch will come on. To turn fully-automatic operation, follow the proce- • If your vehicle has been left in the sun
off the air conditioning system, push in the dure below. with the windows closed, it will cool
switch again; “A/C” and the indicator will go faster if you open the windows briefly.
off. 1) Start the engine. • Even under automatic operation, you
2) Push the “AUTO” switch (8). can set individual selectors to the man-
You can use the air conditioning switch (6) 3) Set the desired temperature by turning
to manually turn the air conditioner on or off ual mode. The manually selected func-
the temperature selector (1). tions are maintained, and the other
according to your preference. When you
turn the air co nditioning switch off, the cli- The blower speed, air int ake and air fl ow functions remain under automatic opera-
mate control system canno t lower the are controlled automatically to maintain the tion.
inside temperature below outside tempera- set temperature. Howe ver, the air flow is • If the windshield and/or the front door
ture. not changed to the defrost position auto- windows are fogged, push the defrost
matically. switch (5) to turn on the defroster, or
push the “MODE” switch (4) to change
To turn the climate control system off, push the air flow to the heat & defrost position
the “OFF” switch (7). (f) to defog the windows.

5-29

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

• To return the blower speed selector (2), Maintenance

air intake selector (3), and “MODE” EXAMPLE If you do not use the air cond itioner for a
switch (4) to automatic operation, push long period, such as during winter, it may
the “AUTO” switch (8). not give the best performance when you
start using it a gain. To help maintain opti-
(11)
EXAMPLE mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for on e minute with the e ngine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
and helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equ ipped with air
filters, clean or replace them as specified
64MS091 in the “Maintenance Schedule” in the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”
NOTE: section.
If you need maximum defrosting:
(10) • push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the NOTE:
defroster (the air conditioning system will Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
64MS149 come on and the fresh air position (b) refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
Be careful not to cove r the in terior tem- will be selected automatically), “R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around
perature sensor (10) located between the • set the blower speed selector to HIGH, 1993 for automotive applications. Other
steering wheel and the climate control • adjust the temperature selector to the refrigerants are available, including recy-
panel, or the solar sensor (11) located at “HI” indication on the display, and cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
the top of th e central p art of the dash- • adjust the side outlets so the air blows in your vehicle.
board. These sensors are used by the on the side windows.
automatic system to regulate temperature. NOTICE
Manual operation Using the wrong refrigerant may
You can manually control the cl imate con- damage your air conditioning sys-
trol system. Set the selectors to the tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or
desired positions. replace the R-134a with other refrig-
erants.

5-30

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Radio Antenna Installation of Radio

Frequency Transmitters
EXAMPLE We recommend that you always ask a
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop about
frequency band, max output power,
antenna position at vehicle and specific
conditions for installation and/or use before
installing a radio transmitter in your vehi-
cle. Such equipments may cause the elec-
tronic control system to malfunction if they
63J055 are incorrectly installed or they are not
The radio antenna on the roof is remov- suited for the vehicle.
able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-
terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn NOTICE
it clockwise firmly by hand. Improper installation of mobile com-
munication equipment such as cellu-
NOTICE lar telephones, CB (Citizen’s Band
To avoid damage to the radio radios or any other wireless trans-
antenna: miters may cause electronic interfer-
• Remove the antenna when using an ence with your vehicle’s ignition
automatic car wash. system, resulting in vehicle perfor-
• Remove the antenna when the mance problems. Consult your
antenna hits anything such as a authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop
low ceiling in a parking garage or or qualified service technician for
putting a car cover over your vehi- advice.
cle.

5-31

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Audio System (if equipped)

EXAMPLE

AM/FM CD PLAYER 64MS186

5-32

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Safety information Notes on Discs Cautions on Handling

Precautions
WARNING
• When the inside of the vehicle is very
If you pay extended attention to oper- cold and the player is used soon after
ating the audio system or viewing the switching on the heater, condensation (A)
audio system display while driving, may form on the di sc or the o ptical
an accident can occur. If you set the parts of the player and proper playback
sound volume too loud, it could pre- may not be possible. If con densation This unit has been designed specifically for
vent you from being aware of road forms on the disc, wipe it off with a soft playback of compact discs bearing mark
and traffic conditions. cloth. If condensation forms on the opti- (A) shown above.
• Keep your eyes on the road and cal parts of the player, do n ot use the
your mind on the drive. Avoid pay- player for a bout one hour. This will
ing extended attention to operating allow the condensation to disappear
the audio system or viewing the normally.
audio system display. • Driving on e xtremely bumpy roads
• Familiarize yourself with the audio which cause severe vibrations may
system controls and operation of cause track to skip.
the audio system before driving. • This unit uses a precision mechanism.
• Preset your favorite radio stations Even in the event that trouble arises,
before driving so that you can never open the case, disasse mble the
quickly tune to them using the pre- unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.
sets. Please bring the u nit to an authorised
• Set the sound volume to a level Maruti Suzuki workshop.
that will allow you to continue to be
aware of road and traffic conditions
while driving.

5-33

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

No other discs can be play remove the roughness (C) from the edges
of the disc before inserting it into the unit.
Removing the disc Proper way to hold
the compact disc

To remove fingermarks and dust, use a

soft cloth, and wipe in a straig ht line from
the center o f the compact disc to the cir-
To remove the compact disc from its stor- cumference. Never stick labels on the surface of the
age case, press down on the center of the compact disc or write on the surface with a
case and lift the disc out, hol ding it care- pencil or pen.
fully by the edges.
Always handle the compact disc b y the (B)
(C) (B)
edges.
Never touch the surface.

Do not use any solvents such as commer-

cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,
New discs may have some roughness or thinner to clean compact discs.
around the edges. The unit may not work
or the sound may skip if suc h discs are
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to

5-34

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
®
NOTE: (If equipped)
• Do not use commercially available CD ®
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
protection sheets or discs equipped with registered trademarks and are own ed by
stabilizers, etc. the Bluetooth SIG, Ink.
These may get caught in the internal
mechanism and damage the disc. Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth®
• It may not be possible to play CD-R ready device whenever requested.
discs with this unit due to the recording This unit shares the communication fre-
conditions. quency with other private or public wireless
• CD-RW discs cannot be played with this communication equipment such as a wire-
Do not use compact discs that have large unit.
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. less LAN and other wireless communica-
Use of such di scs will cause damage or tion radios.
WARNING You should stop using this uni t whenever
prevent the system fro m operating prop-
erly.
This is a class I laser product. Use of you are notifie d that your unit disturbs
controls or adjustments or perfor- other wireless communication immediately.
mance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in Bluetooth® Mic (1) (if equipped)
hazardous radiation exposure.
(1)
Do not open covers and do not
attempt to repair this unit by yourself.
Refer a qualified personnel for servic-
ing.

Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-

light or any heat source.

5-35

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Basic Operations Turning power on/off

Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).
The unit starts in the function mode it was
EXAMPLE in when the power was turned off last.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).
(3)
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;
turning it counterclockwise decreases the
volume.
NOTE:
While driving, adjust the volume to an
extent that sound and/or noise coming
from outside the vehicle can be heard.

(2) (1)

AUX

64MS187

(1) VOL PUSH POWER knob

(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
(3) MUTE button

5-36

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Mute Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-

Press the M UTE button (3) to mute the trol)
sound. To cancel the mute, press the The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function OFF (FLAT)
MUTE button (3) again. automatically adjusts (increases/
decreases) the sound volume in accor- JAZZ
Adjusting bass/treble/balance /fader dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control
1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH is provided with three sel ectable levels
SOUND knob (2). ROCK
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume
Each time the knob is pressed, sound adjustment increases together with the
adjustment will change as follows: POP
LEVEL number.
1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH CLASSIC
SOUND knob (2) until the AVC adjust-
Preset-EQ (EQ OFF) ment mode is selected. HIP-HOP
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
Bass adjustment (BASS 0) SOUND knob (2) to select the de sired
AVC adjustment level. (Initial setting:
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0) LEVEL 2)
Preset-EQ
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)
Preset-EQ calls up various sound types in
accordance with the listening music type.
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)
1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) s everal times until
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)
“PRESET-EQ” appears.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2).
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Each time the knob is turned, preset
SOUND knob (2) to adjust the sound. EQ mode will change as follows:

5-37

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to the Radio Display

(A)
EXAMPLE

(B)

(1) FM button
(7) (2) AM button
(3) Up button
(2) (4) Down button
(1) (5) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
(6) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])
(5) (7) AST button
(A) Band
AUX
(B) Frequency

(4) (3) (6)

64MS188

5-38

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting the FM band Auto store

Press the FM button (1). Hold down the AST button (7) for 2 sec-
Each time the button is pressed, the recep- onds or longer. AST mode on AST mode off
tion band will change as follows: Six stations in good reception will automat-
ically be stored to the Preset buttons (6) in
order, starting from a station whose fre-
FM1 FM2 quency is the lowest. Radio Reception
NOTE: Radio reception can be affected by envi-
• Auto store can be released by pressing ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio
AST button (7) while auto store is under signal’s power and distance from th e sta-
Selecting the AM band way. tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may
Press the AM button (2). • When the auto store is performed, the interfere or deflect radio reception, causing
station previously stored in the memory poor reception. Poor reception or radio
Seek tuning
at the position is overwritten. static can also be caused by electric cur-
Press the see k Up button (3) or th e seek
• When there are fewer than 6 stations rent from overhead wires or high voltage
Down button (4).
that can be stored even if 1 round of power lines.
The unit stops searching for a station at a
frequency where a broadcast station is auto store operation is performed, no
available. station will be stored at the remaining
Preset buttons (6).
Manual tuning • 6 stations can be preset for FM1 and
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND FM2 in common, and 6 stations for AM
knob (5). in auto store mode.
The frequency being received is displayed
. Auto store mode on/off
Preset memory Press the AST button (7).
1) Select the desired station. Each time the button is pressed, the mode
2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6]) is switched as follows:
of the Preset buttons (6) to which you
want to store the station for 2 seconds
or longer.

5-39

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to a CD Display

EXAMPLE (A)

(2) (1) (B)

(1) Insertion slot

(2) Eject button
(6) (3) CD button
(4) Up button
(7) (5) Down button
(8) (6) RPT button
(7) RDM button
(8) DISP button
(A) Track number
(B) Play time
AUX NOTE:
This product does not support 8 cm CD
(sometimes called as “mini single CD”, “3-
inch CD”, “CD3”, etc.).
(5) (4) (3)

64MS189

5-40

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Loading a CD
NOTICE Insert a CD in the Insertion slot (1).
• Never insert your finger or hand When a CD is loaded, play starts.
into the CD insertion slot. Never
(A)
insert foreign objects. Ejecting a CD
• Never insert a CD with glue coming Press the Eject button (2).
out from adhesive tape or a rental When the ignition mode is LOCK (OFF) or
• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A) CD label or with a trace indicating the ignition switch is i n the “LOCK” posi-
cannot be used. that adhesive tape or a rental CD tion, the CD re mained ejected for arou nd
• Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RW label has been removed. This may
15 seconds or longer will automatically be
format may sometimes be impossible cause the CD not to eject or result
in a malfunction. drawn inside the u nit. (Auto relo ad func-
to use. tion)
Selecting a CD mode The backup eject function:
Press the CD button (3). This function allows you to eject a CD by
Each time the button is pressed, the mode pressing the Eject button (2) eve n when
will change as follows: the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF) or the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.

CD NOTICE
If you forcefully try to push an
• A CD is to be inserted with its label side Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) ejected CD inside the unit before auto
up. reloading, the disc surface might be
• When there is a CD already in the unit, AUX (if equipped) scratched.
it is impossi ble to i nsert another CD When reloading a CD, remove it from
the unit completely before reloading.
without ejecting the CD i n the unit. Do
not use force to insert a CD into the CD Listening to a CD
insertion slot. When a CD is inserted, playback will auto-
matically start.
When a CD is alrea dy inside the unit,
press the CD button (3) to start playback.

5-41

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting a track Repeat playback • TRACK REPEAT

• Press the Up button (4) to listen to the Press the RPT button (6). The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
next track. Each time the button is pressed, the mode The track currently being played will be
• Press the Down button (5) twice to lis- will change as follows: played repeatedly.
ten to the previous track.
Display change
When the Down button (5) is pressed
Press the DISP button (8).
once, the track curren tly being played OFF TRACK REPEAT
Each time the button is pressed, di splay
will start from the beginning again.
will change as follows:
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• Hold down the Up button (4) to fast for-
ward the track.
Play time
• Hold down the Down button (5) to fast
rewind the track.
Disc title
Random playback
Press the RDM button (7). Track title
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows:
NOTE:
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
OFF TRACK RANDOM is no text information in the disc currently
being played.
• If text data contains more than 12 char-
acters, the “>” mark will appear at the
• TRACK RANDOM right end. Holding down the DISP button
The random indicator “RDM” will light. (8) for 1 second or longer can display the
The tracks in the l oaded disc will be next page.
played in random order.

5-42

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC Disc Display

EXAMPLE (A) (B)

(D) (C)

(4) (1) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob

(2) Up button
(5) (3) Down button
(6) (4) RPT button
(5) RDM button
(1) (6) DISP button
(A) Folder number
(B) Track number
AUX
(C) Play time
(D) DISC type

(3) (2)

64MS190

5-43

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting a folder Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track Repeat playback

Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND • Hold down the Up button (2) to fast for- Press the RPT button (4).
knob (1) to select a folder. ward the track. Each time the button is pressed, the mode
• Hold down the Down button (3) to fast will change as follows:
Selecting a track
rewind the track.
• Press the Up button (2) to listen to the
next track. Random playback OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT
• Press the Down button (3) twice to lis- Press the RDM button (5).
ten to the previous track. Each time the button is pressed, the mode
When the Down button (3) is pressed will change as follows: • FILE REPEAT
once, the track curren tly being played The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
will start from the beginning again. OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.
• FOLDER REPEAT
• FOLDER RANDOM The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.
The random indicator “F.RDM” will All tracks in the currently selected
light. folder will be played repeatedly.
The tracks in the current folder will be
played in random order.
• ALL RANDOM
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
The tracks in the l oaded disc will be
played in random order.

5-44

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display change Notes on MP3/WMA/AAC Points to remember when making MP3/

Press the DISP button (6). What is MP3? WMA/AAC files
Each time the button is pressed, display Common
will change as follows: • MP3 (MPEG audio layer3) is an aud io • High bit rate a nd high sampling fre-
compression format that has become quency are recommended for high qual-
the standard format among PC users. Its ity sounds.
Play time merit is tha t the original audio data is • Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not
compressed to approximately 1/10 and recommended. Selecting VBR may
Folder name high sound quality is maintained. This cause display of in correct playing time
means that it is possible to store the data and jumpiness of playback.
File name of approximately 10 music CDs on a sin- • Playback sound quality varies depend-
gle CD-R/RW disc, which in turn makes ing on the encoding environment. For
Album name (MP3, AAC only) it possible to play music fo r a long time details, refer to the user manual of the
without having to change the disc. encoding software and the writing soft-
Track title
What is WMA? ware in use.
Artist name • An abbreviation of “Win dows Media
Audio,” WMA is an audio compression NOTICE
format developed by Microsoft.
NOTE: Never assign the “.mp3”, “.wma”, or
• WMA files for which the DRM (Digital
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there “.m4a” file name extension to a file if
Rights Management) function is ON can-
is no text information in the disc currently it is not in the MP3/WMA/AAC format
not be played.
file. Failure to observe this may result
being played. • Windows MediaTM and the W indows®
• If text data contains more than 12 char- in damage to the speaker due to
logo are trademarks or registered trade- noise production.
acters, the “>” mark will appear at the marks of Microsoft Corporation in the
right end. Holding down the DISP button United States and other countries.
(6) for 1 second or longer can display the
next page. What is AAC?
• An abbreviation of “Advanced Audio
Coding,” AAC is an au dio compression
format used by MPEG2 and MPEG4.

5-45

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a CD Compression formats

media MP3
• It is recommended not to write both CD- • Bit rate:
DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files on a MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
disc. MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
• If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
files are on the same disc, tracks may not • Sampling frequency:
be played in the correct order or so me MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/
tracks may not be played at all. 48 kHz
• When storing both MP3 data and WMA MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/
data on the same disc, sort an d place 24 kHz
them in different folders. MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/
• Do not write files other than MP3/WMA/ 12 kHz
AAC files and unnecessary folders on a
disc.
WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• MP3/WMA/AAC files should be named to • Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
meet the standards and the file system • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
specifications as shown below. * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
• The file extension “.mp3”, “.wma” or not supported.
“.m4a” should be assigned to files based AAC*
on their format independently.
• You may en counter a trouble in playing • Bit rate: ABR 16k - 320 kbbs
MP3/WMA/AAC files or displaying infor- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
mation of MP3 /WMA/AAC files depend- * Apple Lossless is not supported.
ing on the writing software or CD recorder Supported file systems
in use. ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo
• This unit does not have a play list func-
tion. Maximum number of files/folders
• It is recommended to write discs in Disc- • Maximum number of files: 512
at-Once mode even though Multi-ses- (files + folders)
sion mode is supported. • Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
• Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)

5-46

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to files stored in a USB device (if equipped) Display

EXAMPLE (A) (B)

(D) (C)

(1) USB button

(5) (2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
(6)
(3) Up button
(4) Down button
(7)
(5) RPT button
(6) RDM button
(2)
(7) DISP button
(A) Folder number
AUX (B) Track number
(C) Play time
(D) File type
(4) (3) (1)
NOTICE
Do not connect any USB device other
than a USB memory or a USB audio
player. Do not connect multiple USB
64MS191
devices to the USB connector using a
USB hub, etc. Supplying power to
multiple USB devices from the con-
nector could cause overheating and
smoking.

5-47

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting a USB device mode • ALL RANDOM Display change

Press the USB button (1). The random indicator “RDM” will light. Press the DISP button (7).
The tracks in the connected USB device Each time the button is pressed, di splay
Selecting a folder will be played in random order. will change as follows:
Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
knob (2) to select the desired folder. Repeat playback
Press the RPT button (5).
Selecting a track Each time the button is pressed, the mode Play time
• Press the Up button (3) t o listen to the will change as follows:
next track. Folder name
• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen
to the previous track. File name
When the Down button (4) is pressed OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT
once, the track cu rrently being played Album name (MP3, AAC only)
will start from the beginning again.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track Track title
• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast for- • FILE REPEAT
ward the track. Artist name
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
• Hold down the Down button (4 ) to fast The track currently be ing played will be
rewind the track.
played repeatedly. NOTE:
Random playback • FOLDER REPEAT • “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
Press the RDM button (6). The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light. is no text information in the disc currently
Each time the button is pressed, the mode All the tracks in the folder currently being played.
will change as follows: selected will be played repeatedly. • If text data contains more than 12 char-
acters, the “>” mark will appear at the
right end. Holding down the DISP button
(7) for 1 second or longer can display the
OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM next page.

• FOLDER RANDOM
The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
The tracks in the currently selected
folder will be played in random order.

5-48

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Notes on USB device Compression formats

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a
Compatible USB devices USB device MP3
• USB Mass Storage Class • Playback or display may not be possible • Bit rate:
For details as to whethe r your USB depending on the type of USB device in MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
memory/USB Audio is comp atible with use or the condition of the recording. MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
USB Mass S torage Class, please con- • Depending on the connected USB mem- MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
tact the USB memory/USB Audio manu- ory, the files may b e played in different • Sampling frequency:
facturer. order from the order that the files were MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
• USB Standard Compatibility 1.1/2.0 Fu ll stored. MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHz
Speed MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz
• File System FAT12/16/32, VFAT
WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• Maximum current less than 1.0 A
• Bit rate: CBR 32 k -320 kbps
• If devices such as USB hub, extension
• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
cable are conne cted to the audi o sys-
* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
tem, it may not be recog nized. In such
not supported.
case connect the U SB device directly to
the audio system. AAC*
• Devices such as MP3 player/Mobile • Bit rate: ABR 16k - 320 kbbs
phone/digital camera may not be recog- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
nized by the audio system for playing * Apple Lossless is not supported.
music.
Maximum number of files/folders
USB device connection • Maximum number of files: 2500
• When connecting a USB d evice, make (files + folders)
sure that the connector is pushed all the • Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
way into the port. • Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
• Do not leave the USB device for long • Maximum number of folders: 255
periods of time in places inside the vehi- (Root folder is included.)
cle where the temperature can rise too
high.
• Back up any important data beforehand.
We cannot accept responsibility for any
lost data.
• It is recommended not to connect a USB
device that contains data files other than
MP3/WMA/AAC format.

5-49

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to an iPod® (if equipped) Display

EXAMPLE (A)

(B) (C)

(1) USB button

(5) (2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
(6) (3) Up button
(4) Down button
(7)
(5) RPT button
(6) RDM button
(2) (7) DISP button
(8) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])
(A) Track title
(B) Track number
AUX

(C) Play time

(4) (3) (8) (1)

64MS192

5-50

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting an iPod® mode Random playback Repeat playback

Press the USB button (1). Press the RDM button (6). Press the RPT button (5).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode
Selecting a track will change as follows: will change as follows:
• Press the Up button (3) t o listen to the
next track.
• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen
to the previous track. OFF SONG RANDOM ALBUM RANDOM OFF SONG REPEAT
When the Down button (4) is pressed
once, the track cu rrently being played
will start from the beginning again.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• SONG RANDOM • SONG REPEAT
• Hold down the Up button (3) to fast for- The random indicator “RDM” will light. The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
ward the track. The tracks in the iPod ® will be played in The track currently be ing played will be
• Hold down the Down button (4 ) to fast
random order. played repeatedly.
rewind the track.
• ALBUM RANDOM Display change
The random indicator “F.RDM” will light. Press the DISP button (7).
The albums in the iPod® will be played in Each time the button is pressed, di splay
random order. will change as follows:

Playlist name /
Track title (Playlist mode only)

Artist name /
Track title

Album name /
Track title

Track title /
Play time

5-51

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTE: Notes on iPod® iPod® connection

If text data contains more than 12 charac- Supported iPod ® • Make sure to detach the iPod® after
ters, the “>” mark will appear at the right • iPod® touch (5th generation) pressing the engine switch to change the
end. Holding down the DISP button (7) for • iPod® touch (4th generation) ignition mode to “L OCK” (OFF) or the
1 second or longer can display the next • iPod® touch (3rd generation) ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
page. • iPod® touch (2nd generation) position. The iPod® may n ot be shut
Playing Mode selection • iPod® touch (1st generation) down when it is being connected and
1) Press the button numbered [6] of the • iPod® classic may result in battery depletion.
• iPod® nano (7th generation) • Please do no t connect iPod® accesso-
Preset buttons (8) fo r 1 second or lon-
• iPod® nano (6th generation) ries such as an iPod® remote control or
ger.
• iPod® nano (5th generation) headphones while connecting the iPod®
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2). • iPod® nano (4th generation) with the unit. The unit may not operate
Each time the knob is turned, the mode • iPod® nano (3rd generation) correctly.
will change as follows: • iPod® nano (2nd generation)
• iPod® nano (1st generation)
• iPod® (5th generation)
• iPod® (6th generation)
PLAYLIST • iPod® (6thPlus generation)
• iPhone® 6 / 6 plus
ARTIST • iPhone® 5
• iPhone® 4S
ALBUM • iPhone® 4
• iPhone® 3GS
SONGS • iPhone® 3G
• iPhone®
GENRE * Some functions may not be ava ilable
depending on the model of iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
3) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH tered in the U.S. and other countries.
SOUND knob (2) to select the de sired * iPhone® is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
mode. registered in the U .S. and other coun-
NOTE: tries.
• When the button numbered [6] of the * Apple is not responsible for the opera-
Preset buttons (8) is pressed, the previ- tion of this device or its compliance with
ous mode will be displayed. safety and regulatory standards.

5-52

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

AUX Function AUX connection

To listen to auxil iary audio sources (sold
EXAMPLE separately) through the unit , follow the
instruction below.
1) Connect the a uxiliary audio source to
the AUX/USB so cket (separately
attached) with an AUX cable.
2) Press the CD button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the
mode will change as follows:

CD

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

AUX
CAUTION
• Before connection, mute the unit,
and also keep the volume of the
auxiliary audio source within a
(1)
range that will not cause distortion.
• When the audio source is turned
off, noise may be emitted. Be sure
64MS193
to turn off the unit or switch to
another mode before turning off the
(1) CD button audio source.

5-53

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTE:
• Please consult your place of purchase
for details about whether a given auxil-
iary audio source can be connected and
the proper auxiliary cord to use.
• The volume and tone controls of the
auxiliary audio source can be adjusted
on the unit.
• In AUX mode, the volume setting is dif-
ferent from another mode.

5-54

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Bluetooth® Hands-Free (if equipped) Steering switch

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(4)

(5)

(6)

EXAMPLE
(1) (2)

AUX

(3) (7)

(4) Bluetooth® setup button

64MS194 (5) Off Hook button
(1) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob (6) On Hook button
(2) VOL PUSH POWER knob (7) VOL switch
(3) Preset buttons

5-55

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Phone registration 6) Press the On Hook button (6). Adjusting the listening volume
• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)
To use the hands-free function with this NOTE: during a call.
unit, it is required to reg ister the phone • When selecting “Go Back”, the previous Turning it cloc kwise increases the vol-
in advance. menu will be displayed. ume; turning it counterclo ckwise
• When additionally registering a phone, decreases the volume.
NOTE: operate the same step from 1). • Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.
• Up to 5 phones can be registered. Receiving a call Pressing “+” of the switch increases the
• To set up a new phone, disconnect the Press the Off Hook button (5) to receive a volume, pressing “-” of the switch
audio player from the unit. Connect the call. decreases the volume.
audio player again after phone setup is
completed if necessary. Ending a call Adjusting the ring volume
• When failed to establish the pairing Press the On Hook button (6) to end a call. • Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)
within 120 seconds, the connecting while a call coming in.
Rejecting a call (only for supported Turning it cloc kwise increases the vol-
operation will be canceled. Please try models) ume; turning it counterclo ckwise
again or refer to the manual of the phone Press the On H ook button (6) to reject a decreases the volume.
in use for how to establish the pairing incoming call. • Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.
with the phone.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). Pressing “+” of the switch increases the
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- volume, pressing “-” of the switch
played. decreases the volume.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND Adjusting the call or ringtone volume
knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the Follow the instructions below to adjust the
selection. call or ringtone volume.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
knob (1) to se lect “Pairing”, and press The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
the knob (1) to determine the selection. played.
4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from the Blue- 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
tooth® menu of the phone and establish SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-
the pairing. phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
Refer to the manual of the phone in use mine the selection.
for further information. 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unit SOUND knob (1) to select “Sound Set-
to the phone. (For ph ones with Blue- ting”, and press the kno b (1) to deter-
tooth® version 2.1 or above passkey mine the selection.
input is not required.)

5-56

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH tone, and press the kno b (1) to deter- NOTE:
SOUND knob (1) to select “Call Vol- mine the selection. • When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
ume” or “Ringtone Volume”, and press menu will be displayed.
NOTE:
the knob (1) to determine the selection. • Pressing “Confirm” after selecting “Add
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
The current call or ringtone volume will Speed Dial” can register the selected
menu will be displayed.
be displayed. number in the speed dial.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Dialing using Missed/Incoming/ • Pressing “Confirm” after selecting
SOUND knob (1) to select desired call Outgoing Calls “Delete” can delete the selected number
or ringtone volume, and press the knob Follow the instructions below to dial to the from the call history.
(1) to determine the selection. last dialed number again. Deletion of call history
NOTE: NOTE: Follow the instructions below to d elete a
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous Up to 10 phone numbers of the latest calls missed/incoming/outgoing call history.
menu will be displayed. can be stored. (10 each for dialed, 1) Press the Off Hook button (5).
received and missed call) The Bluetooth® phonebook menu wi ll
Selecting the Ringtone
be displayed.
Follow the instructions below to select a 1) Press the Off Hook button (5). 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
ringtone. The Bluetooth® phonebook menu wi ll SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). be displayed. Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH determine the selection.
played. SOUND knob (1) to select “Missed 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete His-
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele- Calls”, and press the knob (1) to deter- tory”, and press th e knob (1) to deter-
phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter- mine the selection. mine the selection.
mine the selection. To dial from the dialed history or the 4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH received history, select “Missed Calls”, SOUND knob (1) to select “Missed
SOUND knob (1) to select “Sound Set- “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” Calls”, “Incoming Calls”, or “Outgoi ng
ting”, and press the kno b (1) to deter- respectively. Calls”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
mine the selection. 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH mine the selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select the de sired 5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Ringtone”, number, and press the kn ob (1) to SOUND knob (1) to select a numbe r to
and press the knob (1) to determine the determine the selection. be deleted or “ALL”, and press the knob
selection. 4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH (1) to determine the selection.
The current ringtone will be sounded. SOUND knob (1) to select “Dia l”, and 6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH press the knob (1) or the Off Hook but- SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?” or
SOUND knob (1) to select desired ring- ton (5) to dial to the selected number.

5-57

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

“Delete All?”, and press the knob (1) to 6) Press or tu rn the TUNE FOLDER NOTE:
determine the selection. PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Con- When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH firm”, and press th e knob (1) to deter- menu will be displayed.
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”, mine the selection.
7) Transfer contacts from the phone. Making a call by Phonebook
and press the knob (1) to complete the
When the registration is completed, the Follow the instructions below to dial a num-
deletion.
“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed. ber registered in Phonebook.
NOTE: 1) Press the Off Hook button (5).
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous NOTE: The Bluetooth® phonebook menu wi ll
menu will be displayed. • When selecting “Go Back” the previous be displayed.
menu will be displayed. 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
Registration in Phonebook • Up to 1000 numbers can be registered in SOUND knob (1) to sel ect “Phone-
Registration of numbers in the phonebook. Phonebook. book”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
Follow the instructions below to register
mine the selection.
phone numbers in the Pho nebook of the Transfer of call history (Call History)
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
unit. Follow the instructions below to transfer
SOUND knob (1) to select the initial of
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). call history of the registered phone.
the name you would like to make a call,
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
and press the knob (1) to determine the
played. The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- selection.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH played. The registered numbers will b e dis-
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele- 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH played in sequence. If names h ave
phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter- SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele- been registered together with numbers,
mine the selection. phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter- the names will be displayed.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH mine the selection. 4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Dial ”, and
Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to SOUND knob (1) to select “Call His- press the knob (1) to determine the
determine the selection. tory”, and press th e knob (1) to deter- selection.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH mine the selection. 5) Press the Off Hook button (5).
SOUND knob (1) to select “Add Con- 4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH The displayed number o r the n umber
tacts”, and press the knob (1) to deter- SOUND knob (1) to select “Call His- registered with the displayed name will
mine the selection. tory?”, and press the knob (1) to deter- be dialed.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH mine the selection.
SOUND knob (1) to select “Overwrite 5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Deletion of registered data (Delete
All” or “Add One Contact”, and press SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”, Entry)
the knob (1) to determine the selection. and press the knob (1) to tra nsfer the Follow the instructions below to d elete a
The “Rest of Memory XXXX: Ok?” will call history from the phone. number registered in Phonebook.
be displayed.

5-58

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). NOTE:
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
played. played. menu will be displayed.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
One-touch call (Speed dial)
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele- SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-
Follow the instruction s below to dial the
phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter- phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
number assigned to e ach of the Preset
mine the selection. mine the selection.
buttons (3).
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
1) Press the Off Hook button (5).
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu wi ll
Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to Phonebook”, and press the knob (1) to
determine the selection. determine the selection. be displayed.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete Con- SOUND knob (1) to select “Add Speed SOUND knob (1) to select “Speed
tacts”, and press the knob (1) to deter- Dial”, and press the knob (1) to deter- Dials”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
mine the selection. mine the selection. mine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3).
SOUND knob (1) to select a numbe r to SOUND knob (1) to select a numbe r to When no number is assigned, “No
be deleted, and press th e knob (1) to be assigned, and press the kno b (1) to Entry” is displayed.
determine the selection. determine the selection. 4) Press the Off Hook button (5).
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH The selected number will be dialed.
SOUND knob (1) to se lect “Delete?”, SOUND knob (1) to select “Choose Deletion of speed dial (Del Speed Dial)
and press the knob (1) to determine the Preset”, and press the knob (1) to To delete a number assigned for the speed
selection. determine the selection. dial, follow the instructions below.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 7) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) to 1) Press the Off Hook button (5).
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”, which the selected number is to be The Bluetooth® phonebook menu wi ll
and press the knob (1) to complete the assigned. If a number is already be displayed.
deletion. assigned to the sel ected button, a con- 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
firmation message will be displayed. SOUND knob (1) to select “Speed
NOTE: Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Dials”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”, mine the selection.
menu will be displayed. and press the knob (1) to complete the 3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) to
Registration in speed dial assignment. which the number to b e deleted is
Follow the instructions below to assign a When the assignment is completed, the assigned.
number to one of the Preset buttons to use “Setup Phonebook” will be displayed. “No Entry” appears if the number is not
as the speed dial. registered.

5-59

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH NOTE: 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete”, and When selecting “Go Back”, the previous The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
press the knob (1) to determine the menu will be displayed. played.
selection. 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
Reset to the factory defaults
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-
Follow the in structions below to reset all
SOUND knob (1) to select “Del Speed tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
the settings to the factory defaults.
Dial”, and press the knob (1) to deter- mine the selection.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
mine the selection. 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- SOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,
SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”, played. and press the knob (1) to determine the
and press the knob (1) to complete the 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH selection.
deletion. SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue- 4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter- SOUND knob (1) to sele ct a ph one to
NOTE: mine the selection. be paired with, and press the knob (1)
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH to determine the selection.
menu will be displayed. SOUND knob (1) to select “Initialize”, 5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
and press the knob (1) to determine the SOUND knob (1) to select “Select”, and
Display of device data (Device Name)
selection. press the knob (1) to determine the
Follow the instructions below to display the
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
BD (Bluetooth® Device) address and selection.
SOUND knob (1) to select “All In itial-
device name. ize”, and press the knob (1) to deter- NOTE:
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). mine the selection. • When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- 5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH menu will be displayed.
played. SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”, • The Bluetooth® ready audio device will
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH and press the knob (1) to st art the be disconnected when the phone is
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue- reset. selected.
tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
mine the selection. NOTE: List of phones (List Phones)
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH When selecting “Go Back”, the previous Follow the instructions below to display the
SOUND knob (1) to select “Bluetooth menu will be displayed. names of the regi stered phones in
Info”, and press th e knob (1) to deter- sequence.
Selection of phone (Select Phone)
mine the selection. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
Follow the instructions below to select a
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
phone to be paired with from the registered
SOUND knob (1) to select “Device played.
phones.
Name” or “Device Address”, and press 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
the knob (1) to display the device name SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-
or the BD (Bluetooth® Device) address.

5-60

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter- determine the selection. Select and 6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
mine the selection. determine numbers for the se cond, SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?”,
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH third and fourth di gits in order in the and press the knob (1) to determine the
SOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”, same manner. When not entering up to selection.
and press the knob (1) to determine the the eighth digit, enter bla nks for the 7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
selection. successive digits. SOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
The names of the regi stered phones 7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH and press the knob (1) to determine the
are displayed in sequence. SOUND knob (1) to de termine the selection.
passkey setting.
NOTE: NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous NOTE: When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
menu will be displayed. When selecting “Go Back”, the previous menu will be displayed.
menu will be displayed.
Passkey setting (Set Passkey) Deletion of phone information (Delete
Follow the instructions below to set the Phone)
security number (Passkey). Follow the instructions below to delete the
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4). registered information of the phone.
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
played. The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
played.
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-
mine the selection.
tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
mine the selection.
SOUND knob (1) to select “Passkey”,
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
and press the knob (1) to determine the
SOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,
selection.
and press the knob (1) to determine the
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
selection.
SOUND knob (1) to select “New Pass-
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
key”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
SOUND knob (1) to sele ct a ph one to
mine the selection.
be deleted, and press th e knob (1) to
5) Press or tu rn the TUNE FOLDER
determine the selection.
PUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Con-
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
firm”.
SOUND knob (1) to select “Delete
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
Phone”, and press the knob (1) to
SOUND knob (1) to select a number for
determine the selection.
the first digit, and press the knob (1) to

5-61

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

BT function on/off (BT Power)

Follow the instructions below to turn on/off
the Bluetooth® function.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
played.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-
tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-
mine the selection.
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “BT Power”,
and press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
4) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (1) to select “BT Power
On” or “BT Power Off”.
NOTE:
• When the BT function is turned off, the
connection between this unit and the
registered phone in use will be discon-
nected.
• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
menu will be displayed.

5-62

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) Steering switch

EXAMPLE

(6)

(5)

(2) Display
(A)

AUX

(B)
(4) (3) (1) (1) CD button
(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob
(3) Up button
(4) Down button
64MS195 (5) DISP button
(6) Bluetooth® setup button
(A) Track number
(B) Play time

5-63

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Registration of audio devices NOTE: Selecting a group (only for supported

• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous models)
To use Blu etooth® ready audio devices menu will be displayed. Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
with this unit, it is required to register the • When additionally registering audio knob (2) to select a group.
devices, operate the same step from 1).
devices. Selecting a track
Selecting the Bluetooth® audio mode • Press the Up button (3) to listen to the
NOTE: Press the CD button (1). next track.
• To set up a new audio player, disconnect Each time the button is pressed, the mode • Press the Down button (4) twice to listen
the phone from the unit. Connect the will change as follows: to the previous track.
phone after audio player setup is com- When the Down button (4) is pressed
pleted if necessary. once, the track currently being played
• When failed to establish the connection CD will start from the beginning again.
within 120 seconds, the connecting Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
operation will be canceled. Please try Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) • Hold down the Up button (3) to fast for-
again or refer to the audio player manual ward the track.
for assistance with the pairing process. AUX (if equipped) • Hold down the Down button (4 ) to fast
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). rewind the track.
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
played. NOTE:
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Some functions may not be available
SOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Blue- depending on Bluetooth® audio.
tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter-
mine the selection. Display change
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Press the DISP button (5).
SOUND knob (2) to select “Pairing”, Each time the button is pressed, di splay
and press the knob (2) to determine the will change as follows:
selection.
4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from th e Blue-
tooth® menu of the audio player and Play time
establish the pairing.
Refer to the manual of the audio player
in use for further information. Track name
5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unit
to the audio player. Artist name

Album name

5-64

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTE: • The phone will be disconnected when the NOTE:

If text data contains more than 12 charac- Bluetooth® ready audio device is When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
ters, the “>” mark will appear at the right selected. menu will be displayed.
end. Holding down the DISP button (5) for List of audio devices (List Audio) Passkey setting (Set Passkey)
1 second or longer can display the next Follow the instructions below to display the Follow the instructions below to se t the
page. names of th e registered audio devices in security number (Passkey).
Selection of audio device (Select Audio) sequence. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
Follow the instructions below to select an
audio device to be paired with from the The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- played.
played. 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
registered audio devices. 2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH knob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). SOUND knob (2) to se lect “Setup Blue- press the knob (2) to determine the
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter- selection.
played. mine the selection. 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH knob (2) to select “Passkey”, and press
SOUND knob (2) to select “Setup Blue- SOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”, the knob (2) to determine the selection.
tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter- and press the knob (2) to determine the 4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
mine the selection. selection. The names of registered knob (2) to select “New Pa sskey”, and
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH audio devices will be displayed in press the knob (2) to determine the
SOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”, sequence. selection.
and press the knob (2) to determine the 5) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
selection. SOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH 6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
SOUND knob (2) to se lect an audi o knob (2) to select a number for the first
device to be used , and press the kn ob digit, and press the knob (2) to d eter-
(2) to determine the selection. mine the selection. Select and deter-
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH mine numbers for the second, third and
SOUND knob (2) to select “Select”, and fourth digits in order in the same man-
press the k nob (2) to det ermine the ner. When not entering up to the eighth
selection. digit, enter blanks for the successive dig-
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH its.
SOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”, 7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND
and press the knob (2) to complete the knob (2) to determine the passkey set-
pairing. ting.
NOTE: NOTE:
• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
menu will be displayed. menu will be displayed.

5-65

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Deletion of audio device information Disclaimer for Bluetooth® function Remote Audio Controls
(Delete Audio) • Depending on the mobile phone models, (if equipped)
Follow the instructions below to d elete the some phones may no t be compatible Controlling of basic functions of the audio
registered information of audio device. fully or partially (some functio n may be system is available us ing the switches on
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6). restricted). the steering wheel.
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- • Connectivity or voi ce quality may ge t
played.
2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH affected depending on circumstances.
SOUND knob (2) to se lect “Setup Blue- • After the ignition switch is turned to the (2) (3)
tooth”, and press the knob (2) to deter- “ON” position, the audio system takes
mine the selection. few seconds to detect an d connect to
3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH the Bluetooth® device (if already paired)
SOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”, • Make sure that you are aware of all
and press the knob (2) to determine the applicable lock laws and accordingly use
selection. Bluetooth® device.
4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
SOUND knob (2) to se lect an audi o (1) (4)
device to be del eted, and press the
knob (2) to determine the selection.
5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH Adjusting the volume
SOUND knob (2) to select “Delete”, and • To increase the volume, hold down “+” of
press the knob (2) to determine the the VOL switch (1). The volum e will keep
selection. on being inc reased until the switch is
6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH released.
• To decrease the volume, hold down “-” of
SOUND knob (2) to se lect “Delete?”, the VOL switch (1). The volum e will keep
and press the knob (2) to determine the on being decrea sed until the switch is
selection. released.
7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH • To mute the sound, press the switch (2).
SOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”,
and press the knob (2) to complete the Selecting the mode
deletion. Press the switch (3).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode
NOTE: will change as follows:
When selecting “Go Back”, the previous
menu will be displayed.

5-66

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting the radio station (FM1, FM2,

AM mode)
FM1 (Radio) • To select the n ext preset station, press
“ ” of the switch (4) only for a moment.

<
FM2 (Radio) • To select the previous preset station,
press “ ” of the switch (4) onl y for a

<
CD moment.
• To scan a higher frequency radio station,
Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 second

<
or longer.
AUX (if equipped) • To scan a lower frequency radio station,
press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 second

<
USB (iPod®) (if equipped) or longer.
Selecting the track (CD, USB (iPod®),
AM (Radio) Bluetooth® audio mode)
• To skip to the next track, press “ ” of the

<
It is possib le to tu rn on the audio system switch (4) only for a moment.
by pressing the switch (3). • To skip to the previous track, press “ ” of

<
the switch (4) twice only for a moment.
When the sw itch (4) is pushed down
once only for a moment, the track cur-
rently being played will start from the
beginning again.
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track
• To fast forward, press “ ” of the switch

<
(4) for 1 second or longer.
• To fast rewind, press “ ” of the switch (4)

<
for 1 second or longer.

5-67

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Anti-Theft Feature (1) VOL PUSH POWER knob

(2) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])
EXAMPLE (3) Up button
(4) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob

(4) (1)

AUX

(3) (2)

64MS196

5-68

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

The anti-theft function is intended to dis- Canceling the anti-theft feature Confirming the Personal Identification
courage thefts, such as that the audio sys- To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the Number (PIN)
tem becomes inoperable when it is installed registered PIN. When the main power source is d iscon-
on other vehicles. 1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob nected such as w hen the battery is
This function works by entering a Personal (1) to power off. replaced, etc, it is required to enter the PIN
Identification Number (PIN). 2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1] to make the unit operable again.
When the unit is disconnected from its and [6] of the Preset b uttons (2) a nd 1) Set the ign ition switch to the “ACC”
power source, such as when the audio sys- press the VOL PUSH POWER knob position.
tem is removed or the battery is discon- (1). “SECURITY” will be displayed.
nected, the unit will become inoperable until “PIN ENTRY” will be displayed. 2) Press the Up button (3) and the button
the PIN is reentered. 3) Press the Up button (3) and the button numbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)
Setting the Anti-Theft Function numbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2) simultaneously.
1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1) simultaneously. 3) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
to power off. 4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -
2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1] as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] - [4] of the Preset buttons (2).
and [6] of th e Preset buttons (2) an d [4] of the Preset buttons (2). 4) Hold down TUNE FOL DER PUSH
press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1). 5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob (4) fo r 1 second or lon-
“SECURITY” will be displayed. SOUND knob (4) for 1 second or lon- ger.
3) Press the Up button (3) and the button ger to del ete the registered PIN. T he When the PIN same as registered is
numbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2) indication “----” will be displ ayed and entered, the power of the audio system
simultaneously. the anti-theft function will be canceled. will be turned off automatically and it
4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered will become operable again.
NOTE:
as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] - To change your PIN, first delete your cur- NOTE:
[4] of the Preset buttons (2).
rent PIN, then set a new one. If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR”
5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSH
and the total number of incorrect entry
SOUND knob (4) for 1 second or longer
attempts will be displayed.
to set the anti-theft function.
If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times or
NOTE: more, “HELP” will be displayed and the
Take a note of the registered PIN and keep audio system will become inoperable.
it for the future use.

5-69

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Battery Installation
Install a lithium battery (CR2025) with the poles facing the correct direction.
WARNING
• Do not expose the battery to flame.
EXAMPLE Do not short circuit, disassemble,
or heat the battery.
• Do not charge the battery.
• Use the specified type battery.
• Keep the button-shaped battery
away from children to prevent acci-
dental swallowing.
If the battery is swallowed, contact a
doctor immediately.

CAUTION
• Install the battery with the poles
facing the correct direction.
• When not in use for a long period
of time, or if the battery is dead,
remove the battery from the remote
controller.
Battery replacement timing
• When battery power is depleted, the button may not be operable. If the remote controller If battery leakage has occurred, wipe the
does not operate, replace the battery and check the operation. container first then install a new battery. If
Caution on battery the battery solution contacts the skin, wash
• Be sure to follo w the i nstructions to preve nt battery leakage, over-heating, ignition or off with water completely.
explosion. Caution on Remote Controller
• Do not leave the remote controller in an
area exposed to direct sunlight, such as
on the dashboard or steering wheel. The
remote controller may deform because of
the heat, (Be especially careful of the
dashboard exposed to direct sunlight in
the summer, as it will become extremely
hot).

5-70

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

• When the vehi cle is p arked in an area

exposed to d irect sunlight, Ensure the
remote controller is placed in an area not
exposed to direct sunlight. For example:
Glove box.
Under direct sunlight, signal reception
from the remote controller weakens. If
this happens, hold the remote controller
close to the signal receptor on th e front
panel.

5-71

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Remote Controller (if equipped)

Common operations

POWER button
Power ON / OFF VOLUME button
Press to adjust volume.
(including at AUX mode)
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
In Sound Mode
Press to adjust the sound.(bass/treble/balance/fader)
In Preset-EQ Mode
The Preset-EQ setting switches as follows: MUTE button
OFF (FLAT) VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +
Press to mute the sound. Press it again to cancel
JAZZ SEEK SEEK
the mute.
TRACK ENT TRACK

ROCK
MODE button 1 MENU
TUNE/FLD
2 3
POP
The mode sw itches as 4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP
CLASSIC follows:
MODE AS SOUND SOUND button
FM1
HIP-HOP While playback, the sound mode switches as
FM2 follows (including at AUX mode, except while
In AVC Mode displaying iPod® menu):
CD
The AVC setting switches Preset-EQ
as follows: Bluetooth® audio
(if equipped) BASS
OFF
AUX (if equipped) TREBLE
LEVEL 1
USB (iPod®) BALANCE
LEVEL 2 (if equipped)
FADER
LEVEL 3 AM
AVC

5-72

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Radio operations

AS button
Press to return to the last received frequency in
the previous auto store mode.
Press it for 2 seconds or longer. It selects the
stations with the stronger signals and stores
them in order.

VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +

SEEK SEEK
SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button
TRACK ENT TRACK
Press to select the radio station.
TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3

4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP

MODE AS SOUND
PRESET buttons (1-6)
Press to select the desired preset station.

NOTE:
When there are fewer than 6 stations that can be stored even if 1 round of auto store operation is performed, no station will be
stored at the remaining preset buttons.

5-73

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

CD operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

Press to skip to the next/previous track.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-
RDM (5) button rewind the track.
Press to play the current track randomly.
Press it again to cancel. VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +

SEEK SEEK
DISP (6) button
TRACK ENT TRACK
The display switches as follows:
Play time
TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3

RPT (4) button 4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP Disc title

Press to plays the current track repeatedly. MODE AS SOUND
Track title
Press it again to cancel.
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the
next page.

5-74

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

MP3/WMA/AAC Disc operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

Press to skip to the next/previous track.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward
/fast-rewind the track.
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous folder.

DISP (6) button

The display switches as follows:
RPT (4) button
Play time
The repeat mode switches as follows:
VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +

OFF SEEK SEEK Folder name

TRACK ENT TRACK

FILE REPEAT File name

TUNE/FLD

FOLDER REPEAT
1 MENU 2 3
Album name (MP3, AAC only)
4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP
Track title
MODE AS SOUND

Artist name
RDM (5) button
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the
The random mode switches as follows: next page.
OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

5-75

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

USB operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

Press to skip to the next/previous file.
Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast
rewind the file.
TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button
Press to skip to the next/previous folder.

DISP (6) button

The display switches as follows:
RPT (4) button Play time
VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL +
The repeat mode switches as follows:
Folder name
OFF SEEK
TRACK ENT
SEEK
TRACK
File name
FILE REPEAT TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3 Album name (MP3, AAC only)
FOLDER REPEAT
4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP
Track title
MODE AS SOUND

Artist name

RDM (5) button Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
page.
The random mode switches as follows:
OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

5-76

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

iPod® operations

SEEK TRACK UP/DOWN button

ENT button Press to skip to the next/previous file.
While displaying iPod® menu, press to select the Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-
desired item and display the list. When a track is rewind the file.
selected from the list, the playback starts.

DISP (6) button

TUNE FOLDER UP/DOWN button The display switches as follows:
While displaying iPod® menu, press to display Playlist name /
the next/previous list in the same layer. VOL - TUNE/FLD VOL + Track title (Playlist mode only)
SEEK
TRACK ENT
SEEK
TRACK
Artist name / Track title

Album name / Track title

RPT (4) button TUNE/FLD
1 MENU 2 3
Press to play the current track repeatedly. Track title / Play time
Press it again to cancel.
4 RPT 5 RDM 6 DISP

MODE AS SOUND
Press it for 1 second or longer to display the next
page.

RDM (5) button

The random mode switches as follows:
OFF

SONG RANDOM MENU button

ALBUM RANDOM During playback
• Press to display iPod® menu.
• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.
While iPod® menu is displayed
• Press to display the folder in one layer upper.
• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.

5-77

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Troubleshooting
When encountered a problem, check and follow the instructions as described below.
If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

Common
When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter
the ID.
Unable to operate The security function is on.
When “HELP” is displayed, contact your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Unable to turn on the power (no sound). Contact your authorised Maruti Suzuki
Fuse is blown.
(No sound is produced) workshop.

Radio
It may not be exactly tuned in to the sta-
Much noise Tune it in exactly to the station.
tion.
There may be no station emitting signals
Unable to receive by auto tuning Pick up a station by manual tuning.
powerful enough.

CD

The disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.

Sound skips or noise produced
The disc has a major scratch or is Replace the disc with the one with no
warped. scratch and also not warped.

5-78

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

MP3/WMA/AAC
The disc contains unsupported formatted
No playback Check the file format.
data.
Sound skipping may occur when playing
Sound skips or noise produced It is not recommended to play VBR files.
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files.

USB
There is no supported format fil e to play
Check the file format.
Playback does not start when the U SB on this unit.
device is connected. The current consumption of th e USB Use an U SB device with a current con -
device exceeds 1.0 A. sumption lower than 1.0 A.

Bluetooth®
The distance between this unit and the
Bluetooth® ready device is too far, or a Change the lo cation of the Blu etooth®
metallic object may be located between ready device.
the Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.
Pairing failed
Refer to the manual of the Blu etooth®
®
The Bluetooth function of the Blue- ready device. (Som e devices have the
tooth® ready device is off. power saving function that a utomatically
activates after a certain time.)
Your current location may be ou t of se r- Drive your vehicl e to the service are a of
Unable to receive a call.
vice area. the phone.
The voice q uality of hands-free is low Another wireless device may be located Switch off the wireless device or keep it
(Distortion, noise etc.). near the unit. away from the unit.

5-79

64MS0-74E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Error Display Messages

Display Possible cause Possible solution

CD
Insert the disc with its label side up.
Check the disc if it is not warped or is free of flaws.
ERROR 1 The disc cannot be read.
When ERROR 1 does not disap pear even when a nor-
mal disc is inserted, contact your dealer.
When the CD is in the unit, press the CD eject button to
The player developed an error of an
ERROR 3 remove the disc.
unidentified cause.
When the disc cannot be ejected, contact your dealer.

USB/iPod®

ERROR 1 The USB device is disconnected. Check the connection of the USB device.

Impossible to communicate correctly with Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
ERROR 2
the USB device. Check the USB device.
Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
ERROR 3 Inoperable due to an unidentified cause.
When ERROR 3 does not disappear, contact your dealer.
The current consumption of th e USB
ERROR 4 Check the USB device.
device exceeds 1.0 A.

5-80

64MS0-74E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display Possible cause Possible solution

Bluetooth®
Disconnect the Bluetooth® ready device and connect it
The player developed an error of an
ERROR 1 again.
unidentified cause.
When ERROR 1 does not disappear, contact your dealer.

Failed Failed to establish pairing Try to establish the pairing again.

Reached the limit fo r the number of con- Delete information of unnecessary devices and try to
Memory Full
nected device information establish the pairing again.

Not Avail. Inoperable during driving Operate the system after pulling over your vehicle.

Not Linked Phone is disconnected Try to establish the pairing again.

5-81

64MS0-74E
 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 6-1
Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 6-1

64MS0-74E
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

VEHICLE LOADING AND Trailer Towing

WARNING Your Vehicle was originally designed to
TOWING Never overload your vehicle. The carry people and a normal amount of
gross vehicle weight (sum of the cargo, not to tow a trailer. MARUTI
Vehicle Loading weights of the vehicle, all the occu- SUZUKI does not recommend you use
pants, accessories, cargo plus trailer your vehicle to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer
Your vehicle was designed for specific
nose weight if towing a trailer) must can adversely affect handling, durability,
weight capacities. The weight capacities of
never exceed the Gross Vehicle and fuel economy.
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Weight Rating (GVWR). In addition,
Permissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW, never distribute a load so that the
front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (front weight on either the front or rear axle
and rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICA- exceeds the Permissible maximum
TIONS” section. Axle Weight (PAW).

GVWR – Maximum permissible overall

weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including WARNING
all the occupants, accessories and cargo Always distribute cargo evenly. To
plus the trailer nose weight if towing a avoid personal injury or damage to
trailer). your vehicle, always secure cargo to
PAW – (Front and Rear) Maximum permis- prevent it from shifting if the vehicle
sible weight on an individual axle. moves suddenly. Place heavier
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and objects on the floor and as far for-
actual loads at the front and rear axles can ward in the cargo area as possible.
only be determined by weighing the vehi- Never pile cargo higher than the top
cle. Compare these weights to the GVWR of the seat backs.
and PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehi-
cle weight or the load on either axle
exceeds these ratings, you must remove
enough weight to bring the load down to
the rated capacity.

6-1

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 7-2
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 7-2
Drive Belt ............................................................................. 7-6
Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 7-6
Engine Coolant .................................................................... 7-9
Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 7-11
Gear Oil ................................................................................ 7-11
Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 7-13
Fuel Filter ............................................................................. 7-13
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-13
Steering ................................................................................ 7-15
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-16
Battery .................................................................................. 7-18
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-20
Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 7-24
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 7-24
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 7-34
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 7-37
Air Conditioning System .................................................... 7-38

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING
(Continued)
• When the engine is running, keep
hands, clothing, tools, and other
objects away from the fan and drive
belt. Even though the fan may not
be moving, it can automatically
turn on without warning.
• When it is necessary to do service
work with the engine running, make
60A187S
sure that the parking brake is set
fully and the transaxle is in Neutral.
WARNING • Do not touch ignition wires or other
ignition system parts when start-
You should take extreme care when ing the engine or when the engine
working on your vehicle to prevent is running, or you could receive an
accidental injury. Here are a few pre- electric shock.
cautions that you should be espe- • Be careful not to touch a hot
cially careful to observe: engine, exhaust manifold and
• To prevent damage or unintended pipes, muffler, radiator and water
activation of the air bag system be hoses.
sure the battery is disconnected • Do not allow smoking, sparks, or
and the ignition switch has been in flames around fuel or the battery.
the “LOCK” position for at least 90 Flammable fumes are present.
seconds before performing any • Do not get under your vehicle if it is
electrical service work on your supported only with the portable
MARUTI SUZUKI. Do not touch air hack provided in your vehicle.
bag system components, or wires. • Be careful not to cause accidental
The wires are wrapped with yellow short circuits between the positive
and negative battery terminals.
tape or yellow tubing, and the cou- • Keep used oil, coolant, and other
plers are yellow for easy identifica- fluids away from children and pets,
tion. Dispose of used fluids properly;
• Do not leave the engine running in never pour them on the ground,
garages or other confined areas. into sewers, etc.
(Continued)

7-1

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Schedule Periodic Maintenance

NOTICE
The following table shows the times when Schedule
you should perform regular maintenance Whenever it becomes necessary to “A” :Adjust
on your vehicle. This table shows in miles, replace parts on your vehicle, it is “C”: Clean
kilometers and months when you should recommended that you use MARUTI “R”: Replace or Change
perform inspections, adjustments, lubrica- genuine replacement parts or their “I”: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or
tion and other services. equivalent. replace as necessary
“L”: Lubricate
WARNING “T”: Tighten to Specified Torque
MARUTI SUZUKI recommends that “O”: Rotate
maintenance on your vehicle should
be performed by authorised Maruti NOTE:
Suzuki workshop. This table includes services as scheduled
up to 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000
km, carry out the same services at the
same intervals respectively.

7-2

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading
or months, whichever comes first. km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE
1-1 Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage) l l l R l R l R l R
1-2 Engine oil and engine oil filter - - R R R R R R R R
1-3 Cooling system hoses and connections (Leakage and Damage) l l l l l l l l l l
1-4 Engine Mounting and Manifold Fixing (Noise, Leakage, Damage etc.) l l l l l l l l l l
1-5 Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage etc.) - l - l - I - I - l
1-6 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve D13A engine - - - - C - - C - -
1-7 Camshaft timing belt D16AA engine Replace at every 1,40,000 KM or 60 moths, whichever comes first
FUEL
2-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road Clean after 10,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM.
Dusty Condition Clean after 2,500 KM or as required. Replace after every 40,000 KM.
Replace more frequently if dust condition is severe.
2-2. Fuel tank cap, fuel lines and connections (Leakage and Damage) - l - - - l - - - l
2-3. Fuel Filter and Water Draining I l I R I R I R I R
CLUTCH AND TRANSMISSION
3-1. Clutch fluid (level, leakage) l l l R l R l R l R
3-2. Clutch slipping (Dragging or Excess Damage) l l l l l l l l l l
3-3. Manual Transmission/Transfer or Differential Oil (Level, Leakage) Replace at 1,60,000 km or 10 years whichever comes first
I I I I I I I I I I
DRIVE SHAFT
4-1. Drive shaft boot (boot damage) - l l l l l l l l l
BRAKE
5-1. Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage) I I I R I R I R I R
5-2. Brake pedal (pedal - wall clearance) I I I I I I I I I I
5-3. Parking brake lever and cable (Play, damage) I I I I I I I I I I
5-4. Brake disc and pad (Wear) – I I I I I I I I I

7-3

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading
or months, whichever comes first. km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
5-5. Brake drum and shoes (Wear) - - I I I I I I I I
Master cylinder, wheel cylinder and caliper piston (Fluid leakage, boot/seal
5-6. I I I I I I I I I I
damage)
5-7. Brake hoses and pipes (Fluid leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I
WHEEL
6-1. Tyres (air pressure, abnormal wear, crack and rotation) I I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O
6-2. Wheels (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
6-3. Front/Rear wheel bearing (Loose, damage) I I I I I I I I I I
FRONT / REAR SUSPENSION
7-1. Suspension strut (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I
7-2. Suspension arms / Knuckle support (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I
7-3. Rear spring (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I
7-4. Shock absorbers (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I
7-5. All bolts and nuts (Loose) – T T T T T T T T T
7-6. Torsion rods – I I I I I I I I I
STEERING

8-1. Steering wheel (Play, loose) I I I I I I I I I I

8-2. Steering column and tie rods (Loose, damage, wear) I I I I I I I I I I
ELECTRICAL
9-1. Battery electrolyte (Level, leakage) I I I I I I I I I I
9-2. Wiring harness connection (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I
9-3. Lighting system (Operation, stains, damage) I I I I I I I I I I
9-4. Horn (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I
9-5. System Voltage – I I I I I I I I I
BODY
10-1. All chassis bolts and nuts (Tighten) – I T T T T T T T T
10-2. All latches, hinges and locks (Function) I I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L

7-4

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading
or months, whichever comes first. km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ROAD TEST
11-1. Operation of Brakes, gear shifting and speedometer I I I I I I I I I I
11-2. Body and chassis noise I I I I I I I I I I
AIR CONDITIONER
12-1. Check belt tension I I I I I I I I I I
12-2. Tighten compressor mounting bolt – T T T T T T T T T
12-3. All hose joint (Check, tighten) I I I I I I I I I I
12-4. Check functioning of recirculating flap I I I I I I I I I I
12-5. Clean condenser with low pressure water – C C C C C C C C C
12-6. Check belt for frayed edges I I I I I I I I I I
12-7. Check all mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I
12-8. Air conditioner filter element I I I I R I I R I I

7-5

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Drive Belt Engine Oil and Filter

NOTICE
WARNING Specified Oil Use only the recommended ACEA C2
For D13A Diesel Engine Model engine oil. Use of non-recommended
When the engine is running, keep
engine oil will cause a damage of the
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away Be sure that the engine oil you use comes diesel engine.
from the moving fan and drive belts. under the quality classification of ACEA
A5/B5. Select the appropriate oil viscosity
The belts should also be examined to according to the above chart.
ensure that they are not damaged. SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel
The drive belt’s tension is adjusted economy, and good starting in cold
automatically. weather.
If you need to replace or adjust the belt For D16AA Diesel Engine Model
have it done by your authorised Maruti Be sure that the engine oil you use comes
Suzuki workshop. under the quality classification of ACEA
C2.
SAE 0W-30 is the best choice for good fuel
economy, and good starting in cold
weather.

7-6

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Oil Level Check limit, add enough oil to raise the level to Refilling
the upper limit.
(3) EXAMPLE
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble Open Close
due to insufficient oil.
(2) (1)

NOTICE
(For Diesel Engine Model)
Do not top up the oil over the MAX 81A147
limit. Too much oil causes serious
84E012
engine trouble. Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly
through the filler hole to bring the oil level
(1) MIN to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful
(2) MAX not to overfill. Too much oil is almost as
(3) Engine oil dipstick bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the
It is important to keep the engine oil at the engine and allow it to idle for about a min-
correct level for proper lubrication of your ute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes
vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with and check the oil level again.
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle
is on a slope. The oil level should be
checked either before starting the engine
or at least 5 minutes after stopping the
engine.
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-
ored yellow for easy identification.
Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a
clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way
into the engine, then remove it again. The
oil on the stick should be between the
upper and lower limits shown on the stick.
If the oil level indication is near the lower

7-7

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Changing Engine Oil and Filter Replace the Oil Filter
EXAMPLE
Drain the engine oil while the engine is still For D13A Diesel Engine Model
warm.
NOTE:
EXAMPLE Since special procedures and tools are
required, it is recommended that you trust
this job to your authorised Maruti Suzuki
workshop.
Open Close
1) Using a socket or a ring spanner
60G306 remove oil filter housing cover (3).
(1) Tightening torque for drain plug
20 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14.8 lb-ft) (1)
(2) WARNING
New and used oil can be hazardous.
Children and pets may be harmed by
swallowing new or used oil. Keep new (3)
64MS151 and used oil and used oil filters away (2)
(1) Engine oil filler cap (D13A engine) from children and pets.
(2) Engine oil filler cap (D16AA engine) Repeated, prolonged contact with used
engine oil may cause skin cancer.
1) Remove the oil filler cap. Brief contact with used oil may irritate
2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug. skin.
3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug To minimize your exposure to used oil,
and drain out the engine oil. wear a long-sleeve shirt and moisture-
61M7001
proof gloves (such as dish-washing
CAUTION gloves) when changing oil. If oil con- (1) Loosen
tacts your skin, wash thoroughly with (2) Tighten
The engine oil temperature may be soap and water.
high enough to burn your fingers Launder any clothing or rags if wet 2) Remove the old oil filter element and
when the drain plug is loosened. Wait with oil. replace it with a new oil filter element.
until the drain plug is cool enough to Recycle or properly disposeof used oil 3) Clean the surface of oil filter cap and
touch with your bare hands. and oil filter. replace the O-ring.
4) Tighten the oil filter housing cover on
4) Reinstall the drain plug and gasket. the oil filter housing using a socket or
Tighten the plug with a wrench to the ring spanner to the specified torque.
specified torque.

7-8

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Tightening torque for oil filter For D16AA Diesel Engine Model Engine Coolant
D13A Diesel engine :
Since special procedures and tools are
25 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18.5 lb-ft)
required, it is recommended that you trust
Selection of Coolant
To maintain optimum performance and
this job to your authorised Maruti Suzuki
NOTICE workshop.
durability of your engine, use MARUTI
Genuine Coolant or equivalent.
To prevent oil leakage, make sure
that the oil filter is tight, but do not NOTICE This type of coolant is best for your cooling
over-tighten it. system as it:
• When replacing the oil filter, it is • Helps maintain proper engine tempera-
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks recommended that you use a MAR- ture.
1) Pour oil through the filler hole and UTI genuine replacement filter. If • Gives proper protection against freezing
install the filler cap. you use an after market filter, make and boiling.
For the approximate capacity of the oil, sure it is of equivalent quality and • Gives proper protection against corro-
refer to the “Capacities” item in the follow the manufacturer’s instruc- sion and rust.
“SPECIFICATIONS” section. tions.
2) Start the engine and look carefully for • Oil leaks from around the oil filter Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-
leaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Run or drain plug indicate incorrect age your cooling system. Your authorised
the engine at various speeds for at least installation or gasket damage. If Maruti Suzuki workshop can help you
5 minutes. you find any leaks or are not sure select the proper coolant.
3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min- that the filter has been properly
utes. Check the oil level again and add tightened, have the vehicle
oil if necessary. Check for leaks again. inspected by your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.

7-9

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Coolant Level Check

NOTICE Check the coolant level at the reservoir NOTICE
tank, not at the radiator. With the engine
To avoid damaging your cooling sys- cool, the coolant level should be between • The mixture you use should con-
tem: tain 50% concentration of anti-
• Always use a high quality ethylene the “FULL” and “LOW” marks.
freeze.
glycol base non-silicate type cool- Adding Coolant • If the lowest ambient temperature
ant diluted with distilled water at in your area is expected to be –
the correct mixture concentration. WARNING 35°C (–31°F) or below, use higher
• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/ concentrations up to 60% following
50 coolant to distilled water and in Engine coolant is harmful or fatal if the instructions on the antifreeze
no case higher than 70/30. Concen- swallowed or inhaled. Do not drink container.
trations greater than 70/30 coolant antifreeze or coolant solution. If swal-
to distilled water will cause over- lowed, do not induce vomiting. Imme-
heating conditions. diately contact a poison control
• Do not use straight coolant nor center or a physician. Avoid inhaling
plain water. mist or hot vapors; if inhaled, remove FULL
• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi- to fresh air. If coolant gets in eyes,
tives. They may not be compatible flush eyes with water and seek medi- LOW
with your cooling system. cal attention. Wash thoroughly after
• Do not mix different types of base
coolants. Doing so may result in handling. Solution can be poisonous
accelerated seal wear and/or the to animals. Keep out of the reach of
possibility of severe overheating children and animals.
and extensive engine damage.

61MM0A125

7-10

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Air Cleaner Gear Oil

WARNING If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there
It is hazardous to remove the reser- will be greater intake resistance, resulting Manual Transaxle Oil
in decreased power output and increased When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the
voir tank cap (degassing tank cap) for
fuel consumption. appropriate viscosity and grade as shown
a diesel engine when the water tem- in the chart below.
perature is high, because scalding
fluid and steam may be blown out EXAMPLE We highly recommend you use:
under pressure. Wait until the coolant “MARUTI GEAR OIL 75W-80” for manual
temperature has lowered before transaxle gear oil.
removing the cap.
Manual transaxle oil
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, more coolant should be added.
When the engine is cool, remove the 75W-80
degassing tank cap by turning it anticlock-
wise slowly to release any pressure. And
o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
o
add coolant until the degassing tank level F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
reaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill the 61MM0A126
degassing tank above the “FULL” mark. 68LM728
Unclamp the side clamps and remove the
Coolant Replacement element from the air cleaner case. If it Gear Oil Level Check
Since special procedures are required, we appears to be dirty, replace it with a new 5-speed manual transaxle
recommend you take your vehicle to your one.
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for EXAMPLE
coolant replacement. Clamp the side clamps securely.

(1)

52LM021

7-11

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

6-speed manual transaxle Gear Oil Change

EXAMPLE NOTICE Since special procedures, materials and
When tightening the plug, apply the tools are required, it is recommended that
following sealing compound or you trust this job to your authorised Maruti
equivalent to the plug threads to pre- Suzuki workshop.
vent oil leakage.
MARUTI SUZUKI Bond No. “1216E” or
“1217G”
(2)
71LS10701

To check the gear oil level, use the fol-

lowing procedure:
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with
the parking brake applied. Then, stop
the engine.
2) Remove the oil filler and level plug.
3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the
oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If
gear oil does not flow from the plug
hole, add oil through the filler plug hole
until oil flows a little from the plug hole.
Tightening torque for oil filler and level
plug
Manual transaxle (1) or (2):
21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)

CAUTION
After driving the vehicle, the gear oil
temperature may be high enough to
burn you. Wait until the oil filler and
level plug is cool enough to touch
with your bare hands before inspect-
ing gear oil level.

7-12

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Clutch Pedal Fuel Filter Brakes

Fluid Control Clutch Brake Fluid
EXAMPLE

MAX
MAX

MIN
(1) MIN
64MS141
64MS141
Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-
tion and clutch fluid level from time to time. 64MS175 Check the brake fluid level by looking at
If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully the reservoir in the engine compartment.
The fuel filter works as a water sedimentor Check that the fluid level is between the
depressed, have the clutch inspected by as well.
your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. If “MAX” and “MIN” triangle mark. If the
the clutch fluid level is near the “MIN” trian- Drain water according to the Periodic brake fluid level is near the “MIN” triangle
gle mark, fill it up to the “MAX” triangle Maintenance Schedule. To drain water: mark, fill it up to the “MAX” triangle mark
mark with Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid 1) Place a pan or ample rag under the fuel with Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF)
(MGBF) or DOT 3. filter drain nozzle. or DOT 3.
We highly recommend to use “Maruti Gen- 2) Loosen the drain screw (1). The water We highly recommend to use “Maruti Gen-
uine Brake Fluid” (MGBF). will be drained. uine Brake Fluid” (MGBF).
3) Tighten the drain screw when the water
changes to the diesel fuel.
Tightening torque for drain screw
1.0 Nm (0.10 kg-m, 0.74 lb-ft)

7-13

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Pedal to floor carpet minimum dis-

WARNING WARNING tance “a”: 59 mm (2.3 in.)
With the engine running, measure the dis-
Failure to follow the guidelines below Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal- tance between the brake pedal and floor
can result in personal injury or seri- lowed, and harmful if it comes in con- carpet when the pedal is depressed with
ous damage to the brake system. tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed, approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The
• If the brake fluid in the reservoir do not induce vomiting. Immediately minimum distance required is as specified.
drops below a certain level, the contact a poison control center or a Since your vehicle’s brake system is self-
brake warning light on the instru- physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes, adjusting, there is no need for pedal
ment panel will come on (the flush eyes with water and seek medi- adjustment.
engine must be running with the cal attention. Wash thoroughly after If the pedal to floor carpet distance as
parking brake fully disengaged). handling. Solution can be poisonous measured above is less than the minimum
Should the light come on, immedi- to animals. Keep out of the reach of distance required, have your vehicle
children and animals. inspected by your authorised Maruti
ately ask your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop to inspect the NOTE: Suzuki workshop.
brake system. With disc brakes, the fluid level can be NOTE:
• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in expected to gradually fall as the brake pads When measuring the distance between the
the brake system which should be wear. brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to
inspected by your authorised include the floor mat or rubber on the floor
Maruti Suzuki workshop immedi- Brake Pedal wall in your measurement.
ately. Check if the brake pedal stops at the regular
• Do not use any fluid other than height without spongy feeling when you
depress it. If not, have the brake system
Maruti Genuine Brake Fluid (MGBF) inspected by your authorised Maruti Suzuki
or DOT 3. Do not use reclaimed workshop. If you doubt the brake pedal for
fluid or fluid that has been stored in the regular height, check it as follows:
old or open containers. It is essen-
tial that foreign particles and other
liquids are kept out of the brake
fluid reservoir.

CAUTION
Brake fluid can harm your eyes and
damage painted surfaces. Use cau-
60G104
tion when refilling the reservoir.
54G108

7-14

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Parking Brake Steering

WARNING
If you experience any of the following EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
problems with your vehicle’s brake
system, have the vehicle inspected
immediately by your authorised
Maruti Suzuki workshop.
• Poor braking performance “c”
• Uneven braking (brakes not work-
ing uniformly on all wheels.)
• Excessive pedal travel
• Brake dragging
• Excessive noise
68LM708

Steering wheel play “c”:

0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)
54G109
Check the play of the steering wheel by
Ratchet tooth specification “b”: gently turning it from left to right and mea-
4th – 9th suring the distance that it moves before
Lever pull force (1): you feel slight resistance. The play should
200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs) be between the specified values.
Check the parking brake for proper adjust- Check that the steering wheel turns easily
ment by counting the number of clicks and smoothly without rattling by turning it
made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly all the way to the right and to the left while
pull up on the parking brake lever to the
point of full engagement. The parking driving very slowly in an open area. If the
brake lever should stop between the speci- amount of free play is outside the specifi-
fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels cation or you find anything else to be
should be securely locked. If the parking wrong, an inspection must be performed
brake is not properly adjusted or the by your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-
brakes drag after the lever has been fully shop.
released, have the parking brake inspected
and/or adjusted by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

7-15

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Tires Tire Inspection

Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a EXAMPLE
month by performing the following checks:
1) Measure the tire pressure with a tire
gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-
sary. Remember to check the spare
tire, too.

WARNING
• Air pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold or you may
get inaccurate readings.
• Check the inflation pressure from
EXAMPLE time to time while inflating the tire
gradually, until the specified pres- 54G136
74LHT0704
sure is obtained. (1) Tread wear indicator
The front and rear tire pressure specifica- • Never under-inflate or over-inflate (2) Indicator location mark
tions for your vehicle are listed on the Tire the tires.
Information Label. Both the front and rear Under inflation can cause unusual 2) Check that the depth of the tread
tires should have the specified tire pres- handling characteristics or can groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).
sure. cause the rim to slip on the tire To help you check this, the tires have
Note that the value does not apply to the bead, resulting in an accident or molded-in tread wear indicators in the
spare tire, if equipped. damage to the tire or rim. grooves. When the indicators appear
Overinflation can cause the tire to on the tread surface, the remaining
burst, resulting in personal injury. depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Overinflation can also cause or less and the tire should be replaced.
unusual handling characteristics 3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and
which may result in an accident. damage. Any tires with cracks or other
damage should be replaced. If any tires
show abnormal wear, have them
inspected by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

7-16

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Rotation
CAUTION NOTICE 5-tire rotation
Hitting curbs and running over rocks Replacing the original tires with tires
can damage tires and affect wheel of a different size may result in false
alignment. Be sure to have tires and speedometer or odometer readings.
wheel alignment checked periodi- Check with your authorised Maruti
cally by your authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop before purchasing
Suzuki workshop. replacement tires that differ in size
from the original tires.
4) Check for loose wheel nuts.
5) Check that there are no nails, stones or
other objects sticking into the tires.
80JK040

WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire

which is a different wheel type than the
• Your MARUTI SUZUKI is equipped wheels on the vehicle, you must use a 4-
with tires which are all the same tire rotation as shown in the example
type and size. This is important to below.
ensure proper steering and han-
dling of the vehicle. Never mix tires 4-tire rotation
of different size or type on the four
wheels of your vehicle. The size
and type of tires used should be
only those approved by MARUTI
SUZUKI as standard or optional
equipment for your vehicle.
• Replacing the wheels and tires
equipped on your vehicle with cer-
tain combinations of aftermarket
wheels and tires can significantly 54G114
change the steering and handling
characteristics of your vehicle. To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to
• Therefore, use only those wheel prolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-
and tire combinations approved by trated. Tires should be rotated every 10000
MARUTI SUZUKI as standard or km (6000 miles). After rotation, adjust front
optional equipment for your vehi- and rear tire pressures to the specification
cle. listed on your vehicle’s Tire Information
Label.

7-17

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Wheel Balancing Care and maintenance tips for tubeless Battery

If the vehicle vibrates abnormally on tyres
smooth road, have the wheel balanced at 1) Always maintain recommended infla-
authorised Maruti Suzuki Workshop. tion pressure. Driving continuously at WARNING
low inflation pressure can lead to tyre • Batteries produce flammable
Wheel Alignment damage. hydrogen gas. Keep flames and
In case of abnormal tyre wear or pulling 2) In case any leakage is found, check for sparks away from the battery or an
towards one side, have the wheel aligned any nail penetration/valve core damage explosion may occur. Never smoke
at authorised Maruti Suzuki Workshop. or rim bent. Damaged wheel must not when working in the vicinity of the
be used. battery.
Tubeless Tyres (If equipped) 3) In case tyre has run at low pressure, it • When checking or servicing the
The vehicle is equipped with Tubeless must be inspected for any defect. battery, disconnect the negative
Tyres. In tubeless tyre, a thin layer of butyl 4) Whenever new tyre is fitted, replace the cable. Be careful not to cause a
rubber is used for lining the inside of the valve. short circuit by allowing metal
tubeless tyre. This layer is to prevent air 5) If continuous high speed driving is objects to contact the battery posts
loss and fulfilling the purpose of tube. The required, increase tyres pressure by 5 and the vehicle at the same time.
air pressure is maintained by the sealing psi over recommended inflation pres- • To avoid harm to yourself or dam-
between tyre bead and wheel rim. Tube- sure. age to your vehicle or battery, fol-
less tyres are having advantage of slow air 6) Never run the tyre beyond TWI (Tread low the jump starting instructions
loss and preventing sudden deflation while wear indicator). The tyre is recommen- in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”
driving. ded to be replaced when the remaining section of this manual if it is neces-
tread has worn to this point. The indica- sary to jump start your vehicle.
tors are spaced across the tread • Diluted sulfuric acid spilled from
around the tyre marked by a triangular battery can cause blindness or
symbol (TWI). severe burns. Use proper eye pro-
7) Always prefer tubeless tyre mounting tection and gloves. Flush eyes or
machine. In case of manual mounting- body with ample water and get
tyre/wheel rim damage may occur. medical care immediately if suf-
8) In case of any problem, please get in fered. Keep batteries out of the
touch with authorised Maruti Suzuki reach of children.
workshop.

7-18

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Replacement of the battery (For D16AA Diesel Engine Model)

EXAMPLE (For D13A Diesel Engine Model)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

(1)
(1)
76MS006

For maintenance-free battery (cap-less

type), you need not add water. For tradi-
tional type battery, which has water filler
caps, the level of the battery solution must 64MM07001
be kept between the upper level line (1)
and lower level line (2) at all times. If the NOTE:
level is found to be below the lower level (For D13A Diesel Engine Model)
line (2), add distilled water to the upper To approach the battery, remove the suc-
61MS2A006
level line (1). You should periodically check tion pipe (1).
the battery, battery terminals, and battery NOTE:
hold-down bracket for corrosion. Remove (For D16AA Diesel Engine Model)
corrosion using a stiff brush and ammonia To approach the battery, loosen the bolts,
mixed with water, or baking soda mixed push the locks and remove the suction
with water. After removing corrosion, rinse pipe (1).
with clean water.
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for
a month or longer, disconnect the cable
from the negative terminal of the battery to
help prevent discharge.

7-19

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuses
(1) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as
(2) described below:
Main fuse
(3) The main fuse takes current directly from
the battery.
Primary fuses
These fuses are between the main fuse
(4) and individual fuses, and are for electrical
load groups.
(6) Individual fuses
(4) 64MS176
(5) These fuses are for individual electrical cir-
NOTE: cuits.
64MM07002 When putting the battery in the battery tray, To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller (1)
To remove the battery: make sure the recess on the terminal side provided in the fuse cover.
1) Disconnect the negative cable (1). bottom of the battery engages with the
2) Disconnect the positive cable (2). convex portion of the tray.
3) Remove the battery band bracket (if 2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery
equipped) (3), by removing the mount- cables securely.
ing bolts (4). NOTE:
4) Remove the bracket bolt (5) and When the battery is disconnected, some of (1)
remove the bracket (6). the vehicle’s function will be initialized and/
5) Remove the battery. or deactivated.
To install the battery: These function are required to reset after
1) Install the battery in the reverse order of the battery is reconnected.
removal.

64MS198

7-20

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuses in the Engine Compartment (22) 7.5 A ECM (D13A)

MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE
(23) 30 A Blower fan
(1) (1) 60 A FL7
(24) 10 A FI 2 (D13A)
(2)
(6) (2) 80 A FL6
(25) 20 A INJ DRV (D13A)
(3)
(3) 100 A FL5
(26) 7.5 A Starting signal
(4) 80 A FL4
(4)
(7) (27) 15 A Headlight (Left)
(5) 100 A FL3
(5) (28) 15 A Headlight high (Left)
(6) 100 A FL2
61MM0B068 (29) 7.5 A FI 2 (D16AA)
(7) 120 A FL1
(30) 20 A INJ DRV (D16AA)
(8) 7.5 A Ignition-1 signal 2 (D16AA)
(8) (24) (29) (31) 15 A FI 3 (D16AA)
(9) 30 A Radiator fan 2
(25) (30)
(9) (18) (26) (31) (32) 15 A Headlight (Right)
(10) 20 A Front fog light
(10) (27) (32)
(28) (33) (33) 15 A Headlight high (Right)
(11) (11) 7.5 A Headlight 2
(34) 50 A Ignition switch 2
(12) (12) 25 A ABS control module
(13) (35) 50 A Battery
(14)
(19)
(13) 25 A Headlight
(20) (34) The main fuse, primary fuses and some of the
(14) 30 A Back up
(15) (21) individual fuses are located in the engine
(22) compartment. If the main fuse blows, no elec-
(16) (35) (15) 40 A Ignition switch
(17) (23) trical component will function. If a primary fuse
(16) 40 A ABS motor blows, no electrical component in the corre-
64MS177 (17) 30 A Starting motor sponding load group will function. When
replacing the main fuse, a primary fuse or an
(18) 30 A Radiator fan individual fuse, use a Maruti genuine part. To
(19) 30 A FI main remove a fuse, use the fuse puller provided in
the fuse box. The amperage of each fuse is
(20) 20 A Fuel pump shown in the back of the fuse box cover.
(21) 10 A Air compressor

7-21

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuses under the Dash Board

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
OK
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)
(23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29)
(30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) (36)
BLOWN

64MS181

60G111 68LM701

(1) (2) (1)

WARNING
If the main fuse or a primary fuse
blows, be sure to have your vehicle
inspected by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop. Always use a
Maruti genuine part. Never use a sub-
stitute such as a wire even for a tem-
porary repair, or extensive electrical
damage and a fire can result.
NOTE:
Make sure that the fuse box always carries
spare fuses. 64MS112

NOTE:
To approach the fuses, remove the clips
(1) by prying it off with a flat blade screw-
driver as shown in the illustration, then
remove the cover (2).

7-22

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(21) 15 A Wiper / Washer

PRIMARY FUSE
(22) 30 A Front wiper
(1) – Blank
(23) 10 A Dome light
(2) 20 A Power window timer
(24) 15 A 4WD*
(3) 15 A Steering lock
(25) 7.5 A RR fog lamp* OK BLOWN
(4) 20 A Rear defogger
(26) – Blank 81A283
(5) 20 A Sunroof*
(27) 7.5 A Ignition-1 signal
(6) 10 A DRL* WARNING
(28) 15 A Radio 2 Always be sure to replace a blown
(7) 10 A Heated mirror*
(29) 10 A Accessory socket 3 fuse with a fuse of the correct amper-
(8) 7.5 A Starting signal age. Never use a substitute such as
(30) 15 A Radio aluminum foil or wire to replace a
(9) 15 A Accessory socket 2 blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and
(31) 10 A Tail lamp the new one blows in a short period
(10) 30 A Power window
(32) 20 A D/L of time, you may have a major electri-
(11) 10 A Hazard cal problem. Have your vehicle
(33) 7.5 A Cruise control inspected immediately by your
(12) 7.5 A BCM authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
(34) 10 A Meter
(13) 15 A Ignition coil
(35) 7.5 A Ignition-2 signal
(14) 10 A ABS control module
(36) 20 A Seat heater*
(15) 15 A Accessory socket
*Feature not available in the vehicle.
(16) 10 A A-STOP controller*
(17) 15 A Horn
(18) 10 A Stop light
(19) 10 A Air bag
(20) 10 A Back-up light

7-23

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Headlight Aiming Bulb Replacement Headlights

Since special procedures are required, we Discharge headlights
CAUTION Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your recommend you take your vehicle to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for • Light bulbs can be hot enough to
burn your finger right after being authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
headlight alignment. bulb replacement.
turned off. This is true especially
for halogen headlight bulbs.
Replace the bulbs after they
become cool enough.
• The headlight bulbs are filled with
pressurized halogen gas. They can
burst and injure you if they are hit
or dropped. Handle them carefully.
• To avoid injury by sharp-edged
parts of the body, wear gloves and
a long-sleeved shirt when replacing
61MM0A031
light bulbs.

WARNING
NOTICE
Never attempt to replace the bulb of a
The oils from your skin may cause a discharge headlight, or you could
halogen bulb to overheat and burst suffer an electric shock from the
when the lights are on. Grasp a new high-voltage circuit in the headlight
bulb with a clean cloth. system. Always have a discharge
headlight bulb replaced by an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
NOTICE
Frequent replacement of a bulb indi-
cates the need for an inspection of
the electrical system. This should be
carried out by your authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

7-24

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Halogen headlights (1)

(4)

(5)
(1)
61MM0B073 EXAMPLE 64MS162
64MS161
NOTE:
2) Push the retaining spring (4) forward You can see the position of retaining spring
and unhook it. Then remove the bulb from the hole of headlight.
(5). Install a new bulb in the reverse
order of removal.

(3)

(2)

61MM0B074

1) Open the engine hood. Disconnect the

coupler (2). Remove the sealing rubber
(3).

7-25

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Side Turn Signal Light (if equipped) Front Turn Signal Light (1)
Front Position Light (2)
(Vehicle with the halogen headlights)

(2)
(3)

(4)

(1)
(5)

76MH0A008
76MH0A006
(1)
1) Remove the light housing (1) by sliding (4) Removal
to left with your finger. (5) Install 61MM0A030
3) To remove and install the bulb of the
turn signal light (3), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.
(2)

76MH0A007

2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise and

pull it out from the light housing.

7-26

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(Vehicle with the discharge headlights)

EXAMPLE

(2)

(2) (3)
(1) (4) (1) (1)
61MM0B077
61MM0A091
1) Open the engine hood. To remove the
bulb holder of the front turn signal light To replace the bulb of the front turn signal
61MM0B078 light (1), follow the procedure for the front
(1) or the front position light (2) from the turn signal light bulb replacement of the
light housing, turn the holder counter- (3) Removal
(4) Install vehicle with the halogen headlights.
clockwise and pull it out. 2) To remove the bulb of the front turn sig- NOTE:
nal light (1) from the bulb holder, push Position function in discharge headlamp is
in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.
To install a new bulb, push it in and turn LED type, which is non replaceable.
it clockwise.
To remove and install the bulb of the
front position light (2), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.

7-27

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Front Fog Light (if equipped)

1) Start the engine. Turn the steering (2) EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
wheel to rotate the tires to the opposite
side of the fog light that requires
replacement. Then turn off the engine.

80JM071

61MM0B080 5) Disconnect the coupler by pushing the

3) Remove the clips (2) by prying it off with lock release. Turn the bulb holder coun-
(1) a flat blade screwdriver as shown in the terclockwise and remove it.
EXAMPLE illustration.
61MM0B079

2) Remove the screws (1).

EXAMPLE
61MM0B081

4) Open the end of the cover inside the

fender.

7-28

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Rear Combination Light

EXAMPLE

(3)
(1)
(4) (3) / (4)
(5)
(6)
(2)
61MM0B083 61MM0B084

2) To remove the bulb holder of the rear (5) Removal

61MM0B082 turn signal light (3) or the tail/brake light (6) Install
1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the light (4) from the light housing, turn the
3) To remove the bulb of the rear turn sig-
housing (2) straight. holder counterclockwise and pull it out. nal light (3) or the tail/brake light (4)
from bulb holder, push in the bulb and
turn it counterclockwise. To install a
new bulb, push it in and turn it clock-
wise.

7-29

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Reversing Light the reversing light (4) counterclockwise

and remove it.

EXAMPLE
(2)

(1)
(4)

(5)
(6)

61MM0B085 61MM0B088

NOTE: 1) Open the tailgate. Remove the clips (1) 61MM0B090

When reinstalling the light housing, make by prying it off with a flat blade screw-
sure the clips are properly attached. driver as shown in the illustration. Then, (5) Removal
pull out the trim (2). (6) Install
3) To remove and install the bulb of the
reversing light (4), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.

(4)

(3)
61MM0B089

2) Disconnect the coupler (3) by pushing

the lock release. Turn the bulb holder of

7-30

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

License Plate Light High-mount Stop Light

(1)
(2)
61MM0B086 61MM0B087
1) Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise to 2) To remove and install the bulb of the (1)
EXAMPLE
remove it. license plate light (2), simply pull out or
80J100
push in the bulb.
1) Open the tailgate, and remove the nuts
(1) as shown in the illustration.

7-31

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

(3)

(4)
(2)
68KS063
(5)
EXAMPLE 3) Remove the bulb holder as shown in
63J127 the illustration.
76MH0A128
2) Close the tailgate. Remove the high- (4) Removal
mount stop light housing (2) from the (5) Install
tailgate.
4) To remove and install the bulb of the
high-mount stop light (3), simply pull out
or push in the bulb.

7-32

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interior Light Front (with overhead console) Luggage compartment (if equipped)
Remove the lens by using a flat blade
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as
shown. To install it, simply push it back in.
Front (without overhead console)

64MS123 61MM0B072

Center
61MM0A207

60G115

7-33

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Glove Box Light (if equipped) Wiper Blades

Since special procedures are required, we EXAMPLE
recommend you take your vehicle to your
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
bulb replacement.
(1)
EXAMPLE

54G129

61M0109 If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-

2) Push the damper (1) (if equipped) right- aged, or make streaks when wiping,
61M0108
ward to remove the grove box. replace the wiper blades.
1) Press inward on both side of the glove
box to unclamp it. To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-
EXAMPLE cedures below.

NOTICE
To avoid scratching or breaking the
window, do not let the wiper arm
strike the window while replacing the
wiper blade.
NOTE:
Some wiper blades may be different from
the ones described here depending on
(2) vehicle specifications. If so, consult your
64MS096 authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for
proper replacement method.
3) To remove and install the bulb of the
glove box light (2), simply pull out or
push in the bulb.

7-34

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

For windshield wipers: Removal

EXAMPLE

60A260

Installation
70G119

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-

dow.
NOTE:
When raising both of the front wiper arms,
pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.
When returning the wiper arms, lower the
passenger’s side wiper arm first.
Otherwise, the wiper arms may interfere
with each other.

54G132
54G130

2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2) (1) Locked end
and remove the wiper frame from the
arm as shown.
3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper blade
and slide the blade out as shown.

7-35

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

For rear wipers:

EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(1)
(A)

(1) (B)
(3)

60MH072
54G135 (A) Up
(1) Retainer (B) Down
4) If the new blade is provided without the NOTE:
two metal retainers, move them from When you install the metal retainers (3),
the old blade to the new one. make sure the direction of metal retainers
as shown in the above illustrations.
EXAMPLE 5) Install the new blade in the reverse
(3) order of removal, with the locked end
positioned toward the wiper arm.
Make sure the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks. Lock the
blade end into place.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making
sure that the lock lever is snapped
securely into the arm. 80G146

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-

dow.
2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm
(3) as shown.
3) Slide the blade out as shown.
60MH071

7-36

64MS0-74E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

5) Install the new blade in the reverse Check that there is washer fluid in the tank
order of removal. by looking at the washer fluid level gauge
Make sure the blade is properly which is attached to the cap of the washer
retained by all the hooks. fluid tank. If the fluid level is near empty,
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the refill it. Use a good quality windshield
reverse order of removal. washer fluid, diluted with water as neces-
sary.
Windshield Washer Fluid
EXAMPLE WARNING
Do not use radiator antifreeze in the
windshield washer reservoir. This
EXAMPLE can severely impair visibility when
sprayed on the windshield, and also
65D151
damage your vehicle’s paint.
NOTE:
Do not flex the wiper blade frame end more NOTICE
than necessary. If you do, it can break off.
Damage may result if the washer
EXAMPLE motor is operated with no fluid in the
80JM078 washer tank.

(1) EXAMPLE

(1)

54G135

(1) Retainer
4) If the new blade is provided without the
two metal retainers, move them from
the old blade to the new one. 64MS097

7-37

64MS0-74E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Air Conditioning System

If you do not use the air conditioner for a (1)
long period, such as during winter, it may (3)
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil (2)
and helps protect the internal components.
Replacement of the Air Conditioner
Filter (if equipped)
Since special procedures are required, we
recommend you take your vehicle to your 79MH0761
authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for the 2) Remove the cover (1) and pull out the
air conditioner filter replacement. air conditioner filter (2).
1) To access the air conditioner filter, NOTE:
remove the glove box. Refer to the pro- When you install a new filter, make sure
cedure for the bulb replacement of the the UP mark (3) faces upward.
“Glove Box Light” in this section.

7-38

64MS0-74E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 8-1
Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 8-2
Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 8-5
Towing .................................................................................. 8-6
If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 8-7
If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 8-7
If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 8-7
Warning Triangle.................................................................. 8-8

64MS0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

Tire Changing Tool

WARNING
After using the tire changing tools, be
sure to stow them securely or they
can cause injury if an accident
occurs.

CAUTION
The jack should be used only to
change wheels. It is important to read
the jacking instructions in this sec-
tion before attempting to use the
jack.

EXAMPLE

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

EXAMPLE (1)
61MM0B100

(1) Spare tire 64MS142

(2) Jack
(3) Jack handle To remove the spare tire, turn its bolt (1)
(4) Wheel Brace counterclockwise and remove it.
(5) Luggage Compartment Board
The tire changing tools are stowed in the luggage compartment.

8-1

64MS0-74E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

Jacking Instructions 5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel

being lifted as shown in the illustration
in case that the jack slips.

63J101

6) Position the jack at an angle as shown

75F062 in the illustration and raise the jack by
54G253
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground. turning the jack handle clockwise until
2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift the jack-head groove fits around the
into “R” (Reverse). jacking bar beneath the vehicle body.
7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and
WARNING smoothly until the tire clears the
ground. Do not raise the vehicle more
• Be sure to shift into “R” (Reverse) than necessary.
when you jack up the vehicle.
• Never jack up the vehicle with the
transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-
wise, unstable jack may cause an
accident.
3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if
your vehicle is near traffic.
4) Block the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the wheel being
lifted.

63J100

8-2

64MS0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

To Raise the Vehicle with a Garage Rear jacking point for garage jack (2)
WARNING Jack EXAMPLE
• Use the jack only to change wheels • Apply the garage jack to one of the points
on level, hard ground. indicated below.
• Never jack up the vehicle on an • Always support the raised vehicle with
inclined surface. jack stands (commercially available) at
• Never raise the vehicle with the jack the points indicated below.
in a location other than the specified
jacking point (shown in the illustra- Front jacking point for garage jack (1)
tion) near the wheel to be changed.
• Make sure that the jack is raised at EXAMPLE
least 25 mm (1 inch) before it con-
tacts the flange. Use of the jack (2)
when it is within 25 mm (1 inch) of
being fully collapsed may result in 64MS140
failure of the jack.
• Never get under the vehicle when it Application point for jack stand (3)
is supported by the jack. or two-column lift
• Never run the engine when the vehi-
cle is supported by the jack and EXAMPLE
never allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.

(3) (3)
(1)
61MM0B103
64MS178

8-3

64MS0-74E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

NOTICE
(1)
Never apply a garage jack to the
exhaust pipe, side under spoiler (if
equipped), engine undercover or rear
torsion beam.

NOTE:
For more details, please contact an autho-
rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.
Changing Wheels (2)
To change a wheel, use the following pro-
cedure:
(3) 81A057
1) Remove the jack, tools and spare
wheel from the vehicle. Tightening torque for wheel nut
2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel (4) 85 Nm (8.7 kg-m, 62.7 lb-ft)
nuts. 7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts
65J4033
3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking in a crisscross fashion with a wrench as
instructions in this section). 5) Before installing the new wheel, clean shown in the illustration.
any mud or dirt off from the surface of
WARNING the wheel (1), hub (2), thread part (3)
and surface of the wheel nuts (4) with a WARNING
• Be sure to shift into “R” (Reverse) clean cloth. Clean the hub carefully; it Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten
when you jack up the vehicle. may be hot from driving. them to the specified torque as soon
• Never jack up the vehicle with the 6) Install the new wheel and replace the as possible after changing wheels.
transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other- wheel nuts with their cone shaped end Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
wise, unstable jack may cause an facing the wheel. Tighten each nut tightened wheel nuts may come loose
accident. snugly by hand until the wheel is or fall off, which can result in an acci-
securely seated on the hub. dent. If you do not have a torque
4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. wrench, have the wheel nut torque
checked by an authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

8-4

64MS0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

Jump starting instructions

NOTICE
WARNING Your vehicle should not be started by (1)
pushing or towing. This starting
• Never attempt to jump start your
method could result in permanent
vehicle if the battery appears to be
damage to the catalytic converter.
frozen. Batteries in this condition
Use jump leads to start a vehicle with
may explode or rupture if jump
a weak or flat battery.
starting is attempted.
• When making jump lead connec- When Jump Starting Your Vehicle, (3)
tions, be certain that your hands Use the Following Procedure:
and the jump leads remain clear (2)
from pulleys, belts, or fans. 1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump start EXAMPLE
• Batteries produce flammable your vehicle. Position the good 12-volt
54MN259
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and battery close to your vehicle so that the
sparks away from the battery or an jump leads will reach both batteries. 3) Make jump lead connections as follows:
When using a battery installed on
explosion may occur. Never smoke another vehicle, DO NOT LET THE 1. Connect one end of the first jump
when working in the vicinity of the VEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parking lead to the positive (+) terminal of the
battery. brakes fully on both vehicles. flat battery (1).
• If the booster battery you use for 2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except 2. Connect the other end to the positive
jump starting is installed in another those necessary for safety reasons (for (+) terminal of the booster battery (2).
vehicle, make sure the two vehicles example, headlights or hazard lights). 3. Connect one end of the second jump
are not touching each other. lead to the negative (–) terminal of the
• If your battery discharges repeat- booster battery (2).
4. Make the final connection to an
edly, for no apparent reason, have unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.
your vehicle inspected by an engine mount bracket (3)) of the
authorised Maruti Suzuki work- engine of the vehicle with the flat bat-
shop. tery (1).
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-
age to your vehicle or battery, fol- WARNING
low the jump starting instructions
below precisely and in order. Never connect the jump lead directly
• If you are in doubt, call for qualified to the negative (–) terminal of the dis-
road service. charged battery, or an explosion may
occur.

8-5

64MS0-74E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

CAUTION Towing 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) Manual Tran-

If you need to have your vehicle towed, saxle
Connect the jump lead to the engine Manual transaxle vehicles may be towed
mount bracket securely. If the jump contact a professional service. Your dealer using either of the following methods.
lead disconnects from the engine can provide you with detailed towing
mount bracket because of vibration at instructions. 1) From the front, with the front wheels
the start of the engine, the jump lead lifted and the rear wheels on the ground.
could be caught in the drive belts. NOTICE Before towing, make sure that the park-
ing brake is released.
4) If the booster battery you are using is fit- Observe the following instructions 2) From the rear, with the rear wheels lifted
ted to another vehicle, start the engine of when towing your vehicle. and the front wheels on the ground, pro-
the vehicle with the booster battery. Run • To help avoid damage to your vehi- vided the steering and drivetrain are in
the engine at moderate speed. cle during towing, proper equipment operational condition. Before towing,
5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the and towing procedures must be make sure that transaxle is in neutral,
flat battery. used. the steering wheel is unlocked (vehicle
6) Remove the jump leads in the exact • Using the frame hook, tow your without keyless push start system - the
reverse order in which you connected vehicle on paved roads for short dis- ignition key should be in the “ACC” posi-
tances at low speed. tion) (vehicle with keyless push start sys-
them. tem - the ignition mode is ACC), and the
steering wheel is secured with a clamp-
ing device designed for towing service.

NOTICE
The steering column is not strong
enough to withstand shocks transmit-
ted from the front wheels during tow-
ing. Always unlock the steering wheel
before towing.

8-6

64MS0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

If the Starter Does Not Operate If the Engine is Flooded If the Engine Overheats
1) Try turning the ignition switch to the If the engine is flooded with the fuel, it may The engine could overheat temporarily
“START” position or try pressing the
engine switch to change the ignition be hard to start. If this happens, press the under severe driving conditions. If the high
mode to START with the headlights accelerator pedal all the way to the floor engine coolant temperature warning light
turned on to determine the battery condi- and hold it there while cranking the engine. comes on as overheating during driving:
tion. If the headlights go excessively dim • For petrol engine model, do not operate 1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.
or go off, it usually means that either the the starter motor for more than 12 sec- 2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and
battery is flat or the battery terminal con- onds. park.
tact is poor. Recharge the battery or cor- • For diesel engine model, do not operate 3) Let the engine run at the normal idle
rect battery terminal contact as the starter motor for more than 30 sec- speed for a few minutes until the high
necessary. onds. engine coolant temperature warning
light goes off.

WARNING
If you see or hear escaping steam,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and
immediately turn off the engine to let
it cool. Do not open the hood when
steam is present. When the steam
can no longer be seen or heard, open
the hood to see if the coolant is still
boiling. If it is, you must wait until it
stops boiling before you proceed.

8-7

64MS0-74E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

If the high engine coolant temperature

warning light does not go off: EXAMPLE
1) Turn off the engine and check that the Warning Triangle
water pump belt and pulleys are not
damaged or slipping. If any abnormality EXAMPLE
is found, correct it.
2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.
If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”
line, look for leaks at the radiator, water
pump, and radiator and heater hoses. If
you locate any leaks that may have
caused the overheating, do not run the MHO-07-001
engine until these problems have been In case of vehicle break-down or during
corrected. emergency stopping, where, your vehicle
3) If you do not find a leak, carefully add could become a potential traffic hazard,
65D350D
coolant to the reservoir and then the keep the warning triangle, provided with
radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine your vehicle, on the road free from any
Coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND WARNING obstacles behind your vehicle so as to
MAINTENANCE” section.) warn the approaching traffic, at an approxi-
• It is hazardous to remove the radia-
NOTE: tor cap (or degassing tank cap for a
mate distance of 50-100 m. The reflecting
If your engine overheats and you are diesel engine) when the water tem-
side of the triangle should face the on com-
unsure what to do, contact your authorised perature is high, because scalding
ing traffic. Please activate the hazard
Maruti Suzuki workshop. fluid and steam may be blown out
warning lamps before alighting the vehicle
to keep the warning triangle.
under pressure. The cap should
only be taken off when the coolant
temperature has lowered.
• To help prevent personal injury,
keep hands, tools and clothing
away from the engine cooling fan
and air-conditioner fan (if
equipped). These electric fans can
automatically turn on without warn-
ing.

8-8

64MS0-74E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

MHO-07-014
MHO-07-015
• Remove the warning triangle carefully
from the cover as shown by arrow 1.
• Open both the reflector arms as shown
by arrow and lock the arms with each
other with the clip provided in the right
arm. Open the bottom stand in counter
clock-wise direction as shown by arrow
3. Position the warning triangle behind
the vehicle on a plain surface.
• Reverse the removal procedure for keep-
ing inside the cover.

8-9

64MS0-74E
 APPEARANCE CARE

APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 9-1
Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 9-2

64MS0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE

APPEARANCE CARE vehicle which are not well ventilated to

permit quick drying.
required. Be sure that any cleaner you use
is not harmful to painted surfaces and is
Corrosion Prevention This information illustrates the necessity of
specifically intended for your purposes.
Follow the manufacturer’s directions when
It is important to take good care of your keeping your vehicle (particularly the using these special cleaners.
vehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listed underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It
below are instructions for how to maintain is equally important to repair any damage Repair finish damage
your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please to the paint or protective coatings as soon Carefully examine your vehicle for damage
read and follow these instructions carefully. as possible. to the painted surfaces. Should you find
any chips or scratches in the paint, touch
Important Information About Corro- How to Help Prevent Corrosion them up immediately to prevent corrosion
sion Wash your vehicle frequently from starting. If the chips or scratches have
Common causes of corrosion The best way to preserve the finish on your gone through to the bare metal, have a
1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, mois- vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to qualified body shop make the repair.
ture, or chemicals in hard-to-reach keep it clean with frequent washing. Keep passenger and luggage compart-
areas of the vehicle underbody or Wash your vehicle at least once during the ments clean
frame. winter and once immediately after the win- Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate under
2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the the floor mats and may cause corrosion.
treated or painted metal surfaces underside, as clean and dry as possible. Occasionally, check under these mats to
resulting from minor accidents or abra- If you frequently drive on salted roads, ensure that this area is clean and dry. More
sion by stones and gravel. your vehicle should be washed at least frequent checks are necessary if the vehicle
once a month during the winter. If you live is used off road or in wet weather.
Environmental conditions which accel- near the ocean, your vehicle should be Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertiliz-
erate corrosion washed at least once a month throughout ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-
1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea the year. rosive by nature. These products should be
air or industrial pollution will all acceler- transported in sealed containers. If a spill or
ate the corrosion of metal. For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi- leak does occur, clean and dry the area
2) High humidity will increase the rate of cle Cleaning” section. immediately.
corrosion particularly when the tem-
Remove foreign material deposits Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti-
perature range is just above the freez-
Foreign material such as salts, chemicals, lated area
ing point.
road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle
industrial fall-out may damage the finish of ventilated area. If you often wash your
for an extended period of time may pro-
your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces. vehicle in the garage or if you frequently
mote corrosion even though other body
Remove these types of deposits as quickly drive it in when wet, your garage may be
sections may be completely dry.
as possible. If these deposits are difficult to damp. The high humidity in the garage
4) High temperatures will cause an accel-
wash off, an additional cleaner may be may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet
erated rate of corrosion to parts of the

9-1

64MS0-74E
 APPEARANCE CARE

vehicle may corrode even in a heated Vehicle Cleaning Cleaning the Interior
garage if the ventilation is poor.
Vinyl upholstery
Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-
WARNING gent mixed with warm water. Apply the
Do not apply additional undercoating solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft
or rust preventive coating on or cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to
around exhaust system components loosen dirt.
such as the catalytic converter, Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth
exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be to remove dirt and the soap solution. If
started if the undercoating substance some dirt still remains on the surface,
becomes overheated. repeat this procedure.
Fabric upholstery
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Using a mild soap solution, rub stained
areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove
76G044S
soap, rub the areas again with a cloth
dampened with water. Repeat this until the
WARNING stain is removed, or use a commercial fab-
ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a
When cleaning the interior or exterior fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-
of the vehicle, NEVER USE flammable facturer’s instructions and precautions.
solvents such as lacquer thinners,
petrol, benzene or cleaning materials Leather upholstery
such as bleaches or strong house- Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
hold detergents. The materials could Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution,
cause personal injury or damage to wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.
the vehicle. To remove soap, wipe the areas again with
a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the
areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this
until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a
commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt
or stains. If you use a leather cleaner,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and precautions. Do not use solvent
type cleaners or abrasive cleaners.

9-2

64MS0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE

NOTE: again with a cloth dampened with water. Cleaning the Exterior
• In order to keep leather upholstery look- Repeat this until the stain is removed, or
ing good, it should be cleaned at least use a commercial carpet cleaner for NOTICE
twice a year. tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,
• If leather upholstery becomes wet, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc- It is important that your vehicle be
immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper tions and precautions. kept clean and free from dirt. Failure
or a soft cloth. Water may cause leather to keep your vehicle clean may result
to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off. Instrument panel and console in fading of the paint or corrosion to
• When parking on sunny days, select a Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. various parts of the vehicle body.
shady place or use a sunshade. If Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezed
damp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirt Caring for Aluminum Wheels
leather upholstery is exposed to direct NOTE:
sunlight for a long time, it may discolor is removed.
• Do not use an acidic or alkaline detergent
and shrink. to wash aluminum wheels. These types of
• As is common with natural materials, NOTICE
detergent will cause permanent spots,
leather is inherently irregular in grain and Do not use chemical products that discoloration and cracks on finished sur-
cowhide has spots in its natural state. contain silicon to wipe electrical faces.
These do not affect the performance of components such as the air condi- • Do not use a bristle brush and soap con-
the leather in any way. tioning system, audio, navigation taining an abrasive material. These will
system, or other switches. These will damage finished surfaces.
Seat belts
Clean seat belts with a mild soap and cause damage to the components.
water. Do not use bleach or dye on the
belts. They may weaken the fabric in the
belts.
Vinyl floor mats
Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl
with water or mild soap. Use a brush to
help loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,
rinse the mat thoroughly with water and
dry it in the shade.
Carpets
Remove dirt and soil as much as possible
with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap
solution, rub stained areas with a clean
damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas

9-3

64MS0-74E
 APPEARANCE CARE

Washing
CAUTION NOTICE
If your vehicle is equipped with an To avoid damage to the paint or plas-
rain-sensing wiper system, place the tic surface, do not wipe the dirt off
wiper control lever in the “OFF” posi- without ample water. Be sure to fol-
tion. If the lever is left in the “AUTO” low above procedure.
position, the wipers could unexpect-
edly operate and cause an injury, and 3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild
could also be damaged. detergent or car wash soap using a
sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or
When washing the vehicle, park it where cloth should be frequently soaked in the
direct sunlight does not fall on it and follow soap solution.
the instructions below:
1) Flush the underside of body and wheel NOTICE
housings with pressurized water to
60B212S
remove mud and debris. Use plenty of When using a commercial car wash
water. product, observe the cautions speci-
WARNING fied by the manufacturer. Never use
strong household detergents or
• Never attempt to wash and wax your NOTICE soaps.
vehicle with the engine running. When washing the vehicle:
• When cleaning the underside of the • Avoid directing steam or hot water 4) Once the dirt has been completely
body and fender, where there may of more than 80°C (176°F) on plas- removed, rinse off the detergent with
be sharp-edged parts, you should tic parts. running water.
wear gloves and a long-sleeved shirt 5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle body
to protect your hands and arms • To avoid damaging engine compo-
nents, do not use pressurized with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it
from being cut. to dry in the shade.
• After washing your vehicle, carefully water in the engine compartment.
test the brakes before driving to
make sure they have maintained 2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.
their normal effectiveness. Remove dirt and mud from the body
exterior with running water. You may
use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use
hard materials which can scratch the
paint or plastic. Remember that the
headlight covers or lenses are made of
plastic in many cases.

9-4

64MS0-74E
APPEARANCE CARE

6) Check carefully for damage to painted Waxing

surfaces. If there is any damage, touch-
up the damage following the procedure
below:
1. Clean all damaged spots and allow
them to dry.
2. Stir the paint and touch-up the dam-
aged spots lightly using a small
brush.
3. Allow the paint to dry completely.

NOTICE
If you use an automatic car wash,
make sure that your vehicle’s body
parts, such as spoilers, cannot be 60B211S
damaged. If you are in doubt, consult
the car wash operator for advice. After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-
ishing are recommended to further protect
and beautify the paint.
• Only use waxes and polishes of good
quality.
• When using waxes and polishes,
observe the precautions specified by the
manufacturers.

9-5

64MS0-74E
 GENERAL INFORMATION

GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification .......................................................... 10-1
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)
Tag (If equipped) .................................................................. 10-2

10

64MS0-74E
GENERAL INFORMATION

Vehicle Identification also used to assist your dealer when

ordering or referring to special service
Chassis Serial Number information. Whenever you have occasion
to consult your authorised Maruti Suzuki
EXAMPLE workshop, remember to identify your vehi-
cle with this number. Should you find the
number difficult to read, you will also find it
on the identification plate.
Engine Serial Number

79MH0A01

60G128

The engine serial number is stamped on

the cylinder block as shown in the
illustration.

EXAMPLE
64MS179

The chassis and/or engine serial numbers

are used to register the vehicle. They are

10-1

64MS0-74E
 GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio frequency identification As seen from inside of the vehicle As seen from outside of the vehicle
(RFID) tag (if equipped)
As per Ministry of Road Transport and
Highways, the Radio frequency identifica-
tion (RFID) tag (1) is mandatory for each
vehicle for the purpose of electronic toll
collection or any other purpose as may be
defined by the Government of India.
In case of any damage to RFID tag or
replacement of front windscreen, please
contact your nearest authorised Maruti
Suzuki workshop.

76MH1002 76MH1003

NOTE: NOTE:
The picture shown is for indicative purpose The picture shown is for indicative purpose
only. Internal structure of actual device only. Internal structure of actual device
mounted on vehicle may be different. mounted on vehicle may be different.
NOTE:
• RFID tag needs to be registered by gov-
ernment authorized agency (if applica-
(1) ble).
• Any attempt to remove the tag from the
windscreen will result in permanent dam-
76MH1001 age to the tag.
• Use of chemical cleaners to clean the
windscreen area where the tag is
mounted can damage the tag.
• Use of any sharp objects on the tag can
damage the tag.

10-2

64MS0-74E
 SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M/T: Manual transaxle

ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm

Overall length 4300
Overall width 1765
Overall height without Roof rails 1585
with Roof rails 1590
Wheelbase 2600
Track Front 1535
Rear 1505

ITEM: Mass (weight) UNIT: kg

Curb mass (weight) D13A 1180 – 1205
D16AA 1250 – 1275
Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating D13A 1670
D16AA 1740
Permissible maximum Axle Weight D13A 860
Front
D16AA 940
Rear 840

11-1

64MS0-74E
SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: Engine
Type D13A (DOHC) D16AA (DOHC)
Number of cylinders 4 4
Bore 69.6 mm 79.5 mm
Stroke 82.0 mm 80.5 mm
Piston displacement 1248 cm3 1598 cm3
Compression ratio 17.6 : 1 16.5 : 1

ITEM: Electrical
Battery D13A ENGINE DIN55L/DIN50L
D16AA ENGINE DIN65L
Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

11-2

64MS0-74E
 SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No.

Headlight Halogen 12V 60/55W H4
Discharge 12V 25W D5S
Front fog light 12V 35W H8
Position light 12V 5W W5W
LED –
Turn signal light Front 12V 21W PY21W
Rear 12V 21W PY21W
Side turn signal light 12V 5W WY5W
LED –
Tail/brake light 12V 21/5W P21/5W
High mount stop light 12V 5W W5W
Reversing light 12V 16W W16W
License plate light 12V 5W W5W
Interior light Glove box light (if equipped) 12V 1.4W –
Footwell light (if equipped) / LED –
Instrument panel pocket light
(if equipped)
Center 12V 10W –
Other lights 12V 5W W5W

11-3

64MS0-74E
SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: Wheels and Tires

Tire size, front and rear 205/60R16 92H*1*2
Tire size, spare 205/60R16 92H*2 (Steel wheel)
Rim size 205/60R16 tire: 16X6J
Tire pressures For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label located
on the driver’s door lock pillar.
*1 When tire replacement is necessary and if the specified load index and speed rated tire is not available, then use a tire of higher load
index and speed rating.
*2: The spare wheel provided with alloy wheel variant is steel wheel rim, hence follow 4 tire rotation only. (Refer: Section
“Inspection and maintenance”)

ITEM: Recommended Fuel/Lubricants and Capacities (approx.)

Fuel 48 L
Engine oil D13A 3.2 L (replacement with oil filter)
D16AA 5.25 L (replacement with oil filter)
Engine coolant D13A 6.0 L (including reservoir tank)
D16AA 5.5 L (including reservoir tank)
Manual transaxle oil 5M/T 2.6 L
6M/T 2.1 L
Brake fluid / Clutch fluid Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “INSPEC-
TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

11-4

64MS0-74E
 SPECIFICATIONS

MEMO

11-5

64MS0-74E